00-Introduction_en_US 1..4 - GM Upfitter

2k15_chev_caprice_police_23149028A.ai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust

Color = Black

Date = 09/22/14

Caprice Police Patrol Vehicle

2015

2015 C

apric

e P

olic

e P

atro

l Vehic

le

chevrolet.com 23149028 A

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Caprice Police Patrol Vehicle (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.-7707492) -2015 - CRC - 9/18/14

2015 Chevrolet Caprice Police Patrol Vehicle M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-27

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-24Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-29Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-36

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


2015 Chevrolet Caprice Police Patrol Vehicle M

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . 11-9Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-10Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Special EquipmentOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1SEO Standard Options . . . . . . . 15-1SEO Available Options . . . . . . . 15-6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCAPRICE are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipmentthat was not purchased on thevehicle, model variants, country

specifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23149028 A First Printing ©2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

{ Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or

information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Steering Wheel Controls

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

} : Power On/Off

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Vehicle FeaturesSteering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-12Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-14Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-15E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-5.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-6.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

5. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-19.

6. Solar Sensor. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

7. Infotainment. See Overview onpage 7-2.

8. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

9. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-10.

10. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-4.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-24.

Sport Shift Button. SeeAutomatic Transmission onpage 9-19.

11. Cruise Control on page 9-26.

12. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

13. Horn on page 5-2.

14. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

15. Ignition. See Ignition Positionson page 9-13.

16. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

17. Power Outlets on page 5-4.

18. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

19. CD Player Eject Button. SeeCD Player on page 7-21.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press this button to extend the key.The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

Y : Press and hold until the trunkbegins to move.

7 : Vehicle locator and panic alarmdisabled.

/ : Press Q and release and thenimmediately press and hold/ for atleast four seconds to start theengine from outside the vehicle.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.


In Brief 1-5

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps if a 10-minuteextension is desired. Remote startcan be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

. Use the key in the driver door tounlock it.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:

. Press Q or K.

. Push the door lock knob on thetop of the door to lock.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

See Door Locks on page 2-6 orPower Door Locks on page 2-8.

Windows

Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the switch up toclose it.


1-6 In Brief

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-16.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered without holding the switch.Press the switch down all the way,release it, and the window will godown automatically. Stop thewindow by pressing or pulling theswitch a second time.

See Power Windows on page 2-14.

Seat Adjustment

Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjuster

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.


In Brief 1-7

Lumbar Adjustment

Press and hold the front or rear ofthe control to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the controlwhen the seatback reaches thedesired level of lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-4.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.


1-8 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3-5.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-7.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-8.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-43.

Passenger SensingSystem

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-30.

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights on the overheadconsole are visible when the vehicleis started. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-9.

Mirror AdjustmentAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.The mirror automatically dims toreduce the glare of the headlampsfrom behind.

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. With the ignition on, press theswitch (2) to select the left orright mirror.

2. Press the arrows (1) to adjustthe mirror.


In Brief 1-9

3. Adjust the mirror to see a little ofthe vehicle, and the area behindthe vehicle.

Keep the switch (2) in the centerwhen not adjusting the mirrors.

Folding Mirrors

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to its original position.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out for acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescopelever while driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are on thefront overhead console.

( : Press to turn the lamp off.

' : Press to turn the lamp on.

H : Press to automatically turn onthe lamps when a door is opened,the vehicle is unlocked, or theignition is turned off.


1-10 In Brief

For more information on interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6-4. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6-4. Auxiliary Dome Lamp - SEO 6C7

on page 15-8 (If Equipped).

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turnthex INT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.


In Brief 1-11

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. Air Conditioning

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls

5. Front Defrost

6. ZONE

7. Passenger Temperature Control

8. Recirculation

9. Fan Control

10. Rear Window Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.


1-12 In Brief

Transmission

The shift lever has positions forP (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral),D (Drive), and L (Low).

D: Press the button on the left sideof the instrument panel for SportShift mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9-19.

Vehicle Features

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio functions can becontrolled through the steeringwheel controls.

b / g : Press to interact withBluetooth or voice recognition. SeeBluetooth on page 7-29 or VoiceRecognition on page 7-26.

$ /i : Press to decline anincoming call, or to end a currentcall. Press to silence the vehiclespeakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on. Press to cancelvoice recognition.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select anaudio source.

Use the thumbwheel to select thenext or previous favorite radiostation, CD track, MP3 track, andBluetooth Audio track.

+ x −: Press + to increase thevolume. Press − to decrease.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.


In Brief 1-13

Cruise Control

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is turned on.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+: If there is a set speed inmemory, move the thumbwheel upbriefly to resume to that speed orhold upwards to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

See Cruise Control on page 9-26.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. \: Use the band to scrollthrough the items in each menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-19.


1-14 In Brief

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-29.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet on the center stackunder the climate controls.

To use the outlet, the ignition mustbe in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Remove the cover toaccess the outlet and replace whennot in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

The Performance mode allowsincreased performance whileaccelerating and/or cornering. ThePerformance mode is turned on bypressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To enter the Performance mode,

momentarily press and releasethe TCS/StabiliTrak button g on

the instrument panel. gilluminates in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnoff the Performance mode.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button g on

the instrument panel, until iand g illuminate in theinstrument cluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-24.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).


In Brief 1-15

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-49.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-19.

2. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton on the DIC while the OilLife display is active. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuelon page 9-33. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel on page 9-31.


1-16 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

BatteryThe battery is located in the trunk,behind a trim panel, on the driverside. If the vehicle has the auxiliarybattery option K5S, the auxiliarybattery is in the trunk, behind a trimpanel on the passenger side of thevehicle. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer for one thathas the replacement number shownon the original battery's label.

See Battery on page 10-22.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-4.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button to retract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-4.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-10.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound onsecond press to indicate locking.See “Remote Lock Feedback” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-27. If a passenger door isopen when Q is pressed, all doorslock. If the driver door is openwhen Q is pressed, all doors lockexcept the driver door. Thesesettings can be modified. See“Open Door Anti Lock Out” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-27.

Pressing Q may also arm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm Systemon page 2-10.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-27. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. For more informationsee “Remote Unlock Feedback”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-27. Pressing K may alsodisarm the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System onpage 2-10.

Y (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold until the trunkbegins to move.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Vehicle locator and panicalarm disabled.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Pressand release Q then press and

hold/ for at least four seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5.



The RKE transmitter buttons will notoperate when the key is in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

The following procedure is forprogramming additional transmittersonly. If all vehicle transmitters arelost or no longer work, see yourdealer. A new key and transmittermust be made prior to programming.

Option AMF is a package of sixkeys and transmitters, including sixcut keys with integrated RemoteKeyless Entry. The transmitters arenot programmed.

Each transmitter, including the twostandard with the vehicle, must beprogrammed at the same time bythe customer or by a dealer.

The remote transmitters must beprogrammed separately for avehicle in the fleet.

A maximum of eight keys can beprogrammed for the vehicle with arandom key code. Vehicles with the

fleet key option (RPO 6E3 or 6E4)may have an unlimited number ofkeys learned for these options,using the original master key.

When programming option AMF,which includes six additional RKEtransmitters, the original two vehicletransmitters must also bereprogrammed at the same time.A maximum of eight RKEtransmitters can be programmed fora vehicle.

Programming the Key andTransmitter

1. The six RPO AMF keys arepre-cut at vehicle assembly. If akey is separate from AMF, cutthe new key blank to match theexisting vehicle key.

2. Using the existing key, turn theignition to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Turn the key to OFF/LOCK andremove the key from the ignition.

4. Insert and turn the new key andturn the ignition to ON/RUNwithin 10 seconds of removingthe existing key.

The vehicle has now learned thenew key.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.



{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartRemote start allows the engine tobe started from outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Theremote start button is on the RKEtransmitter.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some laws

require a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.



When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps to extend to20 minutes. Remote start can beextended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend to 20 minutes, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested 30 seconds after starting.The remote start can beextended once.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and theremote start is extended, the enginewill run for a total of 20 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The vehicle is unlocked.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

doors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors from theoutside, press Q or K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

To unlock the door from the outsideuse the key.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:. Pushing down the manual lock

knob on a front door will lock alldoors.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch. See Power DoorLocks on page 2-8.

Free Turning Door Locks

The door lock cylinder is designedto turn freely if it is forcibly rotatedwithout the correct key or if thecorrect key is not fully inserted.

To reset:

1. Fully insert the correct key andturn the lock until the slot isvertical.

2. Remove the key, then reinsert it.

3. If the lock still turns freely, turnthe key 180 degrees and repeatthe procedure.

This feature is a theft deterrent toprevent the lock from being forcedopen. The force required to makethe key turn freely reduces eachtime. Do not demonstrate or test thisfeature.

Always remember to fully insert thekey when locking and unlocking thedoors.



Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Manual Safety Locks

The safety lock is on the insideedge of the rear doors. To use thesafety lock:

1. Insert the key into the safety lockslot and turn it so the slot is inthe horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the rear door with thepower door lock switch or theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it fromthe outside.

2. Insert the key into the safety lockslot and turn it so the slot is inthe vertical position.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

If equipped, see Inoperative RearDoor Locks and Handles - SEO 6N6on page 15-9.



Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-18.

Trunk Release

From inside the vehicle, press|on the driver or passenger door.The ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or the vehiclespeed must be less than 3 km/h(2 mph) for the trunk release tooperate.



Remote Trunk Release

From outside the vehicle, pressYon the RKE transmitter.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

{ Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.

The emergency trunk releasehandle is behind the center rearseat. Pull the release handlesideways to open the trunk from theinside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have an anti-theftalarm system.

The security light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system:

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.



On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunkis open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle with one of thefollowing:. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicate apre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger door, the trunk, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the engine.

. Unlocking using the driver doorkey cylinder will disarm thesystem and not cause an alarmto sound.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the RKE

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-10.



Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The immobilizer activates itselfautomatically after the key has beenremoved from the ignition switch.

The system checks whether thevehicle is allowed to start with thekey used. If the transponder in thekey is recognized, the vehicle canbe started.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the vehicle does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.

If the vehicle does not start with theother transmitter see your dealer.

Do not leave the transmitter thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system, in thevehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press the switch (2) to select theleft or right mirror.

2. Press the arrows (1) to adjustthe mirror.

3. Adjust the mirror to see a little ofthe vehicle, and the area behindthe vehicle.

Keep the switch (2) in the centerwhen not adjusting the mirrors.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Heated MirrorsIf equipped, the vehicle has heatedrearview mirrors.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

The power window switches on thedriver door control all the windows.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Power window switches work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-16.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch to raise thewindow.

Express Down Windows

If equipped, press the switch fully toactivate the express down feature.The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing theswitch.



Rear Window Lockout

Presso to prevent rear seatpassengers from operating thewindows. The indicator lightilluminates when on. Press again toturn the feature off.

If equipped, see Rear WindowsInoperative - SEO 6N5 onpage 15-9.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnectedand the windows cannot be closedautomatically, a warning messagewill display in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). To reprogram thewindows:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closedand keep holding the switch upfor an additional two seconds.

4. Repeat for each window.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-14When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Questions and Answers AboutAirbags and Specialty LawEnforcement Vehicles . . . . . . 3-19

Customer-InstalledEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Airbag DeploymentDiagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-40Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-51


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the sideof the head restraint, and pull up orpush the head restraint down, andrelease the button. Pull and push onthe head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Rear Seats

The vehicle’s rear seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The rear outboard head restraintsare not removable.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.



Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Press and hold the front or rear ofthe control to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the controlwhen the seatback reaches thedesired level of lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-8.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-36 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-38.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-10.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal,near-frontal, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.



Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-11.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer



to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-8.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-11.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-9.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. Onvehicles with front row roof-railairbags, the word AIRBAG is on thetrim above the front windows. Onvehicles with front row and secondrow roof-rail airbags, the word

AIRBAG is on the trim above thefront windows and on the trim nearthe top of the pillar behind thesecond row seats.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashes

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

safety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-16.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

sit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-36 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-38.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-9.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driverand front outboard passenger are inthe ceiling above the side windows.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, front outboardpassenger, and second rowoutboard passengers, they are inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-12. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system’s deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors that helpthe airbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has seat positionsensors that enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat and the front outboardpassenger seat. Seat positionsensors provide information that isused to adjust the deployment of thefrontal airbags.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontalimpacts. Knee airbags are notdesigned to inflate during vehiclerollovers, in rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes, dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.



Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes, depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-14.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst row, or first and second rows (ifequipped). The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-16.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-14.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predetermined

threshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps, andturn off the hazard warning flashersby using the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-11 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-12.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean that

an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Questions and AnswersAbout Airbags andSpecialty LawEnforcement VehiclesQ: Can equipment such as radar

devices, video cameras, andradio trees be mounted in aspecialty vehicle equippedwith a front outboardpassenger frontal airbag?

A: Yes, but care must be taken toproperly mount the equipmentoutside of the airbag“deployment zone.”

Q: What is the airbag“deployment zone”?

A: The term “deployment zone”describes the space an airbagtakes up when fully inflated.Airbags need room to workproperly, and anything in the“deployment zone” — such

as improperly mountedequipment — can greatly affectthe performance of the airbag.

{ Warning

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye. Noobjects, such as shotguns, shouldbe placed over or near the airbagcovers. Equipment mounted tooclose to an inflating airbag couldprevent the airbag from operatingproperly to protect the occupantsor could be forced into anoccupant or break and become adangerous projectile, causingsevere injury or even death. Tohelp prevent injury and to allowthe airbag to perform as it wasdesigned, do not mountequipment inside the airbagdeployment zones.



Q: How can I identify the airbag“deployment zone” in myvehicle?

A: See Airbag DeploymentDiagrams on page 3-22 for moreinformation. The diagramsprovide the approximatedimensions of the “deploymentzones” for your specialty vehicle.Before doing any service work,including the installation of anyequipment, consult theappropriate service manual.

Q: Is it possible to shieldequipment so it does notinterfere with airbagdeployment?

A: While shielding may protectcertain equipment from beingdamaged or dislodged, it mayalso negatively affect how anairbag inflates. Therefore, wecannot recommend theplacement of any equipment inthe deployment zone, evenwhen shielding.

Q: Can the installation of pushbumpers on the front end ofthe vehicle affect thedeployment of the airbag?

A: General Motors is not aware ofadverse effects during crashevents from the many pushbumpers that have beeninstalled on GM police vehicles.Because there are many stylesof push bumpers available withvarying crash characteristics,installation of push bumpers mayor may not affect deploymenttiming of the airbags.

Push bumpers should bemounted to avoid modifying thevehicle structure and interferingwith the front airbag sensorsmounted on the upper radiatorsupport cross member. Two frontimpact sensors are installed inGeneral Motors vehicles. Do notrelocate or disconnect the frontsensors. The location andorientation of the front sensorsare critical for correct operationof the airbag system.

Avoid mounting components onor near the sensors. Pushbumper styles with verticalpushing members that are inalignment with the front airbagsensors are not recommended.

See Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34 for more information.

Customer-InstalledEquipmentBefore installing equipment, readthe following.

When installing aftermarketequipment, see Airbag DeploymentDiagrams on page 3-22.

{ Caution

GM approved service proceduresmust be followed to remove andreinstall the instrument panel tothe pad to ensure proper airbagdeployment.



{ Caution

Do not mount equipment on thepassenger side of the instrumentpanel top pad deployment zone.Equipment should not bemounted on or around thepassenger airbag openingbecause of a deploying airbag. Toallow the airbag to perform as itwas designed, do not mountequipment inside the airbagdeployment zone.

{ Caution

The police vehicle has roof-railairbags. Do not mount a securitybarrier such that the ends of thebarrier or brackets are within theroof-rail deployment zones.

{ Caution

Avoid installing wiring for roof-railemergency lighting or radioantennas that may restrict theproper deployment of the roof-railairbags.

{ Caution

The police vehicle hasseat-mounted side impact airbagsfor the driver and passenger frontseat positions. Restricting thecover from opening preventsproper deployment of theseat-mounted side impact airbag.Do not cover or restrict theseat-mounted side impact airbagcover located on the outboardside of the seatback.

{ Caution

This vehicle has driver and frontpassenger frontal and kneeairbags. Do not install equipmentrearward of the passenger sideinstrument panel that mayinterfere with the deployment ofthe airbags.



Airbag Deployment Diagrams

Standard Roof-Rail and Seat-Mounted Side Impact Airbag Deployment Zones, Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar



1. Roof-Rail Airbag Zone — FrontSeats Only

2. Zone Extends into SailPanel Area

3. Rearmost End of Front Roof-RailAirbag Zone

4. Back Edge of Body Center PillarTrim at Bottom of Rear DoorWindow

5. Front Seat Thorax-PelvicAirbag Zone

6. Foremost End of Seat-MountedThorax Airbag Zone

7. Front Door Armrest

8. Front Door Sill

See Customer-Installed Equipmenton page 3-20 for more information.



Optional (RPO AYG) Roof-Rail and Seat-Mounted Side Impact Airbag Deployment Zones, Passenger SideShown, Driver Side Similar



1. Roof-Rail Airbag Zone — Frontand Rear Seats

2. Front Door Sill

3. Front Door Armrest

4. Foremost End of Seat-MountedThorax Airbag Zone

5. Front Seat Thorax Airbag Zone

6. Back Edge of Body Center PillarTrim at Bottom of Rear DoorWindow

7. Zone Extends into SailPanel Area




Roof-Rail and Seat-Mounted Side Impact Airbag (RPO AKC) Deployment Zones, View from Rear Seat



The driver side is a mirror image ofthe passenger side.

1. Door Sill

2. Seatback

3. Front Seatback Thorax-PelvicAirbag Zone

4. Front Door Handle

5. Bottom of Door Windows

6. Roof-Rail Airbag Zone

7. Center Body Pillar Trim

8. Door Inner Trim Panel

9. Edge of Headliner

10. Centerline of Occupant

11. Head Restraint

12. Vehicle Centerline




Instrument Panel and Approximate Deployment Area of the Driver and Front Passenger Airbags, Viewfrom Top



1. Front of Instrument Panel at theWindshield Base

2. Driver Centerline

3. Vehicle Centerline

4. Radio Center Stack

5. Front Passenger Centerline

6. Front Passenger Door Trim

7. Front Passenger Knee Airbag

8. Glove Box

9. Front Passenger Airbag

10. Driver Airbag

11. Steering Wheel

12. Rearmost Instrument Panel

13. Instrument Cluster

14. Driver Knee Airbag

15. Driver Door Trim


Side View of Steering WheelAirbag Deployment Zone –

Centerline of Driver, View fromRight Side

1. Rearmost Position of InstrumentPanel

2. Top of Windshield

3. Instrument Cluster

4. Driver Knee Airbag

5. Driver Seat

6. Driver Airbag

7. Driver Airbag Zone


Side View of Passenger SideAirbag Deployment Zone –

Centerline of Passenger, Viewfrom Right Side

1. Rearmost Position of InstrumentPanel

2. Top of Windshield

3. Glove Box Door

4. Front Passenger Knee Airbag

5. Front Passenger Seat



6. Front Passenger Airbag

7. Front Passenger Airbag Zone


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 5-9.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag andknee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-9.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn

off the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-9 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if the systemdetermines that an infant is presentin a child restraint. If a child restrainthas been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-49 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-51.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbags for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild's size. It is better to securea child restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontal andknee airbags:




2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers. Alsoremove laptops or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system

operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here’s how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light will alsobe lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is on



the seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the front passenger seat gets wet,dry it immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-9 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-9.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any airbagmodule, ceiling or pillar garnish trim,the inside rearview mirror, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.



Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-30.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-57 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-9.

{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-14. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-9.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by

appropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's

weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-43.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-30 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturer



recommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

1. Outboard Lower Anchors

2. Center Lower Anchors

The outboard lower anchors (1) arebehind the vertical openings in theseat trim. Pull the cover down toaccess the anchors. The centerlower anchors (2) are in the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.



The top tether anchors are on therear seatback filler panel. Be sure touse an anchor on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-42 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.



{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-42.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraint

does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.



2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tether overthe head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and back



and forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-43 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requires

that the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-42.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through or



around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-42.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag under certainconditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-30 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-9 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-30 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal andknee airbags, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-9.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.





5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-30 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.


4-2 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-8Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 5-9Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-10

MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-15Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-15

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-17Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-17Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-23Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-24Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-25Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-25Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-25Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-26Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out for acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescopelever while driving.


Some audio functions can becontrolled through the steeringwheel controls.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press tointeract with Bluetooth or voicerecognition. See Bluetooth onpage 7-29 or Voice Recognition onpage 7-26.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press todecline an incoming call, or to end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on. Press to cancelvoice recognition.

_ SRC ^ (Thumbwheel Control):Press to select an audio source.

Use the thumbwheel to select thenext or previous favorite radiostation, CD track, MP3 track, andBluetooth Audio track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn. See WiringProvisions for Horn/Siren Circuit -SEO 6J4 on page 15-14 (IfEquipped).



Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

1X (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-25.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshield

wiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluidon page 10-20 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clock

Time and Date

1. Press HOME on the radiofaceplate.

2. Press the Config screen buttonon the Home Page.

3. Select Time and Date.

4. Select the desired setting tochange.



Set Time: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the hours and minutes.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

Set Date: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the year, month,and day.

12hr/24hr Format: Press to select12 hour or 24 hour time format.

Press the Back screen buttonto save.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet on the center stackunder the climate controls.

To use the outlet, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Remove the cover toaccess the outlet and replace whennot in use.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain thebattery. Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating.

This circuit is protected by a fuseand has a maximum current level.Do not use equipment exceedingthe maximum amperage rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

{ Caution

Adding any electrical equipmentto the vehicle may damage it orkeep other components fromworking as they should. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of10 amperes. Check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-36.



{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

The word “CERTIFIED” isembossed on thespeedometer face.

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-19.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank. When the indicatornears empty, a message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-25. Thevehicle still has a little fuel left, butthe vehicle should be fueled soon.An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. These arenormal and do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thefuel tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or lessthan half the fuel tank's capacityto fill it.

. The indicator moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-30.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-12.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-30 for

important safety information. Thepassenger airbag status indicator isin the overhead console.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has



turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-9 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-13 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the



OBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and

could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-34. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-31.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This can



happen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

For vehicles with this light, it comeson if a condition exists that mayrequire the vehicle to be taken in forservice.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a base brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Parking Brake Light

This light comes on when theparking brake is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the parkingbrake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the parkingbrake system or another system.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-13 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5-23.

Sport Mode Light

This light comes on when SportMode is selected.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)and StabiliTrak have beenturned off.

The StabiliTrak OFF light will alsocome on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.



If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

{ Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating onpage 10-18.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-18.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-26. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-48.



When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-50.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-12.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-1.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-26.



Door Ajar Light

If equipped, this light comes onwhen a door is open or not securelylatched. Before driving, check thatall doors are properly closed. SeeDoor Ajar Messages on page 5-23.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutthe vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-22. All messages appear inthe DIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-27.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displays,which can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leverto the left of the steering wheel. TheDIC displays trip, fuel, vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. \: Use the band to scrollthrough the items in each menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Use\ to scroll throughthe following possible menu items:. Speedometer. Trip. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy



. Instantaneous Fuel Economy

. Average Vehicle Speed

Speedometer

The speedometer, available onsome vehicles, shows how fast thevehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Press SET/CLR while the Speed isdisplayed to show Capture Speed.Turn the band clockwise to displaythe current Capture Speed. Turningthe band counterclockwise willreturn to the Speed display. Pressand hold SET/CLR while theCapture Speed is displayed to clearit. The Capture Speed is saved untila new speed is captured or it iscleared.

Trip

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is calculatedbased on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The fuel economy can bereset by pressing SET/CLR whilethe Average Fuel Economy display

is showing. On some models, thisdisplay is shown on the same pagewith the instantaneous fuelconsumption display.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

The instantaneous fuel consumptiondisplay shows the currentfuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. Unlikeaverage fuel economy, this displaycannot be reset. On some models,this display is shown on the samepage with the average fuel economydisplay.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The average



speed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information menuis displayed. Use\ to scrollthrough the following possible menuitems:. Battery Voltage. Speed Warning. Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Remaining Oil Life. Units

Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulates

voltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5-10. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message.

Speed Warning

This display is used to set thevehicle speed at which the speedwarning chime sounds and the alertis displayed. The speed can be setby pressing SET/CLR while thespeed warning display is showing.

Tire Pressure Monitoring

This display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-50.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life. If 99%is displayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-24. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.



It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press SET/CLR while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 10-11.

Units

Move\ to switch between metricor US when the Unit display isactive. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-22.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-21.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-26.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.



ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10-8 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Acknowledging the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message willnot reset the system. See“Remaining Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-19 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10-11.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5-17.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on or off. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-2.

CHECK XXX TURNSIGNAL LAMP

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement onpage 10-26 and Replacement Bulbson page 10-31.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Ride Control SystemMessages

PERFORMANCE MODE

This message displays when thevehicle has entered performancemode. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-24.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-24.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-24.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.



SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays if there is aproblem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-50 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-50 for more information.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

There is also an icon with thewarning that will indicate thelocation of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-16.

If a tire pressure message displays,inflate the tires until the tire pressureis equal to the values shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10-40, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9, and TirePressure on page 10-48.

More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the SET/CLR button.The DIC also shows the tire

pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-19.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle to



allow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. Fill thewindshield washer reservoir as soonas possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thewindshield washer reservoir. Also,see Washer Fluid on page 10-20.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

TUNE/MENU: Press to entermenus and select menu items. Turnto scroll through the menus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

The ignition must be in the ONposition.

1. Press CONFIG.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the desired setting.

3. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the desired setting menu.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Languages. Time and Date. Radio Settings. Phone Settings. Display Settings. Vehicle Settings

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the menu. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to select it. Eachmenu is detailed in the followinginformation.

Languages

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

Time and Date

To adjust the time and date settings,see Clock on page 5-3.



Radio Settings

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Auto Volume. Gracenote Options. Max Startup Volume. Number of Favorite Pages. Software Versions Menu

Auto Volume

When selected, this feature willautomatically adjust the volume tominimize the effects of unwantedbackground noise that can resultfrom changing road surfaces, drivingspeeds, or open windows. Thisfeature works best at lower volumesettings where background noise istypically louder than the soundsystem volume.

Select Off, Low, Medium, or High.

Gracenote Options

Select to improve voice recognitionand media groupings.

Select to enable or disable. See CDPlayer on page 7-21, AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-25, andBluetooth Audio on page 7-25.

Max Startup Volume

Select the maximum volume level atstartup even if a higher volume hadbeen set when the radio wasturned off.

Number of Favorite Pages

Select to set the number of FAVpages to be displayed.

Software Versions Menu

Select to display information aboutthe system and software.

Phone Settings

See “Phone” in Bluetooth onpage 7-29.

Display Settings

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Home Page Menu. Display Off

Home Page Menu

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Customize. Sort. Restore Home Page Defaults

Customize

This feature allows the first page ofthe Home Page to be customized.Select up to eight icons to beviewed.

Sort

This feature allows the icons on thefirst Home Page to be rearranged.Select an icon to move with another,then select Done.

Restore Home Page Defaults

This feature returns the first HomePage to the default settings.

Select Yes or Cancel.



Display Off

Select to turn off the display. Thedisplay will return when any buttonis pressed or the screen is touched.

Vehicle Settings

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings?

Climate and Air Quality

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed

Auto Fan Speed

This feature sets the climate controlfan speed to maintain the interiortemperature.

Select High, Medium, or Low.

Comfort and Convenience

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Chime Volume. Button Chime

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Select Normal or High.

Button Chime

When on, a sound will be heardwhen pressing an infotainmentscreen button.

Select to turn this feature on or off.

Lighting

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

Select to turn this feature on or off.When on, the headlamps andback-up lamps will flash when K ispressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Power Door Locks

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Open Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Lock. Auto Door Unlock. Delay Door Lock



Open Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off, the DelayedDoor Lock menu will be available.

Select to turn on or off.

Auto Door Lock

This allows the selection of whetherthe doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whichdoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.

Delay Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select to turn on or off.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select and the following may bedisplayed:. Remote Unlock Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Feedback

If equipped, this allows the selectionof what type of feedback is givenwhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Select Flash Lights or Off.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows the selection of whattype of feedback is given whenlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whichdoors will unlock when pressing Kon the RKE transmitter.

Select Driver Door or All Doors.When set to Driver Door, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen K is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock with the first pressof K.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select to return all vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings.

Select Yes or No.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticoperation of the headlamps atnormal brightness and other exteriorlamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for thisfeature to work.

Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you to turn the high beams on.

The3 indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Push the lever away from you toreturn to low beams.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull thelever toward you. The lamps remainon high beam as long as the leveris held.


6-2 Lighting

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day.

The DRL system makes theheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness when the followingconditions are met:. The engine is running.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The shift lever is out of

the (P) Park position.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automatically switchfrom DRL to the regular headlampsdepending on the darkness of thesurroundings. See “AutomaticHeadlamp System” following.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.

See Delete Daytime Running Lampsand Auto Headlamps - SEO VVS onpage 15-15 (If Equipped).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampsand parking lamps will turn on andoff automatically. See Exterior LampControls on page 6-1.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor; otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps turn off.


Lighting 6-3

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned toP or the ignitionis off.

The automatic headlamp systemdefaults to on with each ignitioncycle.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button on the centerstack near the audio system,to make the front and rear

turn signal lamps flash on andoff. Press again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If a bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses on page 10-32.


6-4 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the instrument panel controlsand infotainment display screen.

Surveillance Mode

The Police Package is equippedwith a circuit that can be connectedto a customer furnished switch tosuppress automatic lighting andaudible signals. The manualcontrols and vehicle messages arestill functional. See SEO StandardOptions - Police Package andSpecial Service Package onpage 15-1.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are on thefront overhead console.

( (Off): Turns the lamps off.

' (On): Turns the lamps on.

H (Door): Automatically turns onthe lamps when a door is opened,the vehicle is unlocked, or theignition is turned off.


Lighting 6-5

When the interior lamps are set todoor activated, they operateautomatically only when it is dark.

The lamps dim to off after all doorsare closed. They turn off about10 minutes after the key is turned tothe lock position. They turn offimmediately if the ignition is turnedon and all doors are closed.

See Auxiliary Dome Lamp - SEO6C7 on page 15-8 (If Equipped).

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and most ofthe interior lamps turn on brieflywhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lamps will dimto off.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-27.

Exit LightingThe exterior lamps will illuminate anarea with limited lighting for a setamount of time when the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-27.

Battery Power ProtectionTo prevent the battery from beingdrained, the glove box, trunk, andreading lamps automatically turn off10 minutes after the ignition isturned off.

The lamps are reactivated if any ofthe following occur:. The ignition is turned on.. The vehicle is unlocked.. The trunk is opened.


6-6 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14Quick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . 7-15Stitcher Internet Radio . . . . . . . 7-18

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Voice RecognitionVoice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with these features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.


7-2 Infotainment System

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling somefunctions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:. Become familiar with the

operation, faceplate buttons, andscreen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-2

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-16.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe infotainment system includesan electronically coded securitysystem.

This electronically links theinfotainment system to the vehicle.

OverviewThe infotainment system iscontrolled by using the buttons,touch screen, steering wheelcontrols and voice recognition.

See Using the System on page 7-5.



1. SRCE (Source)

2. HOME

3. VOL/O (Volume/Power)

4. v /> (Phone/Mute)

5. FAV (Favorites)

6. © SEEK

7. Disc slot (CD)

8. SEEK ¨

9. J (Play/Pause)

10. BACK/

11. TUNE/MENU

12. CONFIG (Configuration)

13. TONE

14. Z (Eject)

Infotainment Control Buttons

The buttons on the faceplate areused to start primary functions whileusing the infotainment system.

SRCE (Source): Press to changethe audio source to AM, FM, CD,or Bluetooth Audio.

HOME: Press to go to the HomePage. See “Home Page” in thissection.

© SEEK (Previous/Reverse):. CD or Bluetooth Audio: Press to

seek to the beginning of thecurrent or previous track.

. CD or Bluetooth Audio: Pressand hold to quickly reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. See CD Player onpage 7-21 or Bluetooth Audio onpage 7-25.



. AM or FM: Press to seek theprevious strong station.

VOL/O (Volume/Power):

. Press to turn the system onand off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

¨ SEEK (Next/Forward):. CD or Bluetooth Audio: Press to

seek the next track.. CD or Bluetooth Audio: Press

and hold to fast forward througha track. Release the button toreturn to playing speed. See CDPlayer on page 7-21 orBluetooth Audio on page 7-25.

. AM or FM: Press to seek theprevious strong station.

J (Play/Pause): Press to pause orresume playback. See CD Player onpage 7-21 or Bluetooth Audio onpage 7-25.

TONE: Press to access the ToneSettings menu screen to adjustBass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, EQ,

Fade, and Balance. Tone settingsare specific to each source. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displaythe current favorite page numberabove the preset buttons. Keeppressing to scroll through thefavorites pages. The stored stationsfor each list display on the bottom ofthe screen. The number of presetFavorite Pages can be changed bypressing the Config button on theHome Page, then pressing RadioSettings, and then pressing Numberof Favorite Pages.

v /> (Phone/Mute). Press to enter the phone main

screen. See Bluetooth onpage 7-29 or Hands-Free Phoneon page 7-35.

. Press and hold to mute orunmute the infotainment system.

BACK/ : Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

TUNE/MENU:

1. Turn to change a radio station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

2. Turn to highlight a feature withina menu. Press the outer ring toactivate the highlighted feature.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toadjust features for Languages, Timeand Date, Radio Settings, PhoneSettings, Display Settings, andVehicle Settings.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a discfrom the infotainment system. SeeCD Player on page 7-21.

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some togglescreen buttons highlight when activeand gray out when inactive.



Using the SystemThe infotainment system iscontrolled by pressing the screenbuttons, using the switches, andpressing the buttons.

Voice recognition is activatedthrough the steering wheel controlsand can be used to control theinfotainment features.

Press b / g on the steering wheelcontrols to begin voice recognition.See Voice Recognition onpage 7-26.

Home Page

Screen Buttons

The Home Page allows access tomany of the features.

Back: Press to return to theprevious page.

Home: Press to go back to theHome Page.

Fav: Press to display a page ofstored favorite AM or FM stations.Continue pressing Fav to scrollthrough the favorite pages.

More r : Press to go to thenext page.

Home Page Customization

The first Home Page can becustomized.

To add screen buttons:

1. Press Menu.

2. Select Customize.

3. Press a screen button to add orremove it from the first HomePage. Af indicates it will bedisplayed. The maximumnumber of buttons on the firstHome Page is eight.

4. Press Done.



To move screen buttons:

1. Select Sort.

2. Press to select an icon to moveand swap with another icon onthe first Home Page only.

3. Press Done.

To restore the first Home Pagedefaults:

1. Press Menu.

2. Select Restore Home PageDefaults.

3. Press Yes or Cancel.

Home Page Features

Screen buttons are highlightedwhen a feature is available.

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, Pandora (if equipped),Stitcher®, and CD.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11,and CD Player on page 7-21.

Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth on page 7-29 andHands-Free Phone on page 7-35.

Press the Config screen button todisplay the Config main page. Fromthis display, adjust features such astime and date, radio, phone, vehicle,and display.

Press the Tone screen button todisplay the Tone main page. Adjustthe tone and speakers by pressingthe screen buttons to change thelevels of sound for treble, midrange,bass, fade, and balance. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7-11.



Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

Press the CD screen button todisplay the CD main page and playthe current or last CD trackselected. See CD Player onpage 7-21.

Press the Pandora screen button (ifequipped) to display the Pandorahome page and streampersonalized radio stations basedon artists, songs, genres, andcomedians. See Pandora InternetRadio on page 7-15.

Press the Stitcher screen button (ifequipped) to display the Stitcherhome page and stream news,sports, and entertainment showsthrough the audio system. SeeStitcher Internet Radio onpage 7-18.

Press the E Bluetooth screen buttonto display the Bluetooth Audio mainpage to play music through aBluetooth device. See BluetoothAudio on page 7-25.



This feature is permanentlydisabled.

This feature is permanentlydisabled.

Touch the Quick Info screen buttonto access information on Audioplaying. See Radio Reception onpage 7-14.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

If equipped with high gloss surfacesor displays, use a microfiber cloth towipe surfaces. Before wiping thesurface with the microfiber cloth,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that could scratch the surface.Then use the microfiber cloth bygently rubbing to clean. Never usewindow cleaners or solvents.Periodically hand wash themicrofiber cloth separately, usingmild soap. Do not use bleach orfabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and may notbe covered by the warranty.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the buttons, knobs, menusshown on the display, and steeringwheel controls.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/O Knob (Volume/Power):Press to turn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/O Knob (Volume/Power):Turn to adjust the volume.

v /> (Phone/Mute): Press andhold to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press v /> again, or turn

the VOL/O knob to cancel mute.



Menu System

Controls

The TUNE/MENU knob and BACK/button are used to navigate themenu system.

TUNE/MENU Knob:

Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

BACK/:

Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toactivate the setting.



Setting a Value

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toturn the function on or off.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select Bass, Mid, or Treble.

3. Select the value.

Press BACK/ to go back to theTone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fade or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.



2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Number of FavoritePages.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press BACK/ to go back to theRadio Settings menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Startup Volume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

VOL/O (Volume/Power):

. Press to turn the radio on or off.

. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume of the active source.

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Radio Operation

The radio will work when the ignitionis in the ON/RUN orAccessory mode.

When the ignition is turned off, theradio will continue to operate for10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.



The radio can be turned on bypressing the power button on theradio and will stay on for10 minutes. Opening the driver doorwill not turn the radio off whenpressing the power button.

The radio can be turned off at anytime by pressing VOL/O.

Audio Source

Press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to display and scrollthrough the available sources AM,FM, CD, and Bluetooth Audio.

Infotainment System Settings

Tone Settings

To access the tone settings, pressTONE or touch the Tone Settingsbutton on the Home Page. Tonesettings are specific to each source.

To adjust the settings:. Bass: Press + or − to change

the level.. Mid (Midrange): Press + or − to

change the level.. Treble: Press + or − to change

the level.. EQ: Press or turn the TUNE/

MENU knob to cycle through thepreset EQ options.

. Fade: Press the F or R screenbutton for more sound from thefront or rear speakers. Themiddle position balances thesound between the front andrear speakers.

. Balance: Press the L or Rscreen button for more soundfrom the left or right speakers.The middle position balancesthe sound between the left andright speakers.

Finding a Station

Press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to select AM, FM,CD, and Bluetooth Audio.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, press FAV to scroll throughthe favorite pages and then press ascreen button.

Seeking a Station

Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to searchfor a station.



AM

1. Press the AM screen button onthe Home Page or select AM bypressing SRCE or SRC on thesteering wheel controls, or say“Tune AM” or “AM” through voicerecognition.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the AM stations orcategories.

3. Press to select an option. Toupdate the station list, pressRefresh.

FM

1. Press the FM screen button onthe Home Page or select FM bypressing SRCE or SRC on thesteering wheel controls, or say“Tune FM” or “FM” through voicerecognition.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the FM stations orcategories.

3. Press to select an option. Toupdate the station list, pressRefresh.

Storing Radio Station Presets

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. AM and FM can be mixed.

1. From the AM or FM main page,press and hold any of the presetscreen buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. After a few seconds,a beep is heard and the newpreset information displays onthat screen button.

2. Repeat for each preset.

Mixed-Band Presets

Each favorite page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be different radiobands.

To scroll through the pages, pressFAV or press the Fav screen button.The current page number displaysabove the preset buttons. Thestored stations for each favoritepage display on the preset buttons.



To change the number of favoritepages displayed:

1. Press Config on theHome Page.

2. Press Radio Settings.

3. Press Number of FavoritePages.

Recalling a Preset Station

To recall a preset station from afavorites page, do one of thefollowing:. Press the Fav screen button at

the top bar to display the presetpop-up. Press one of the presetscreen buttons to go to theselected preset station.

. From the AM or FM main page,press one of the preset screenbuttons to go to the selectedpreset station.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as mobile

phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

Mobile Phone Usage

Mobile phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle.

Driving through an automatic carwash without removing the antennacould damage it.

To remove the antenna, turn itcounterclockwise. To replace theantenna, turn it clockwise until handtightened.

Quick InfoQuick Info gives access to quickinformation on Audio playing.

To access, press Quick Info on theHome Page or the INFO button onthe faceplate. Depending on thesystem and if the options areavailable for that region, someoptions may be grayed out.



Audio Info: Displays informationon the current item playing.

Pandora Internet RadioPandora® (if equipped) is a freeInternet radio service that streamspersonalized radio stations basedon artists, songs, genres, andcomedians. Create stations usingthe Pandora website or smartphoneapplication, then use- (thumbs up)

or, (thumbs down) to personalizestations. To set up an account, or formore information, go towww.pandora.com. Pandora maynot be available in Canada orMexico.

A phone or tablet with Internetconnection and the Pandoraapplication installed is required.Personal cell phone data plans areused. Make sure the latest versionis installed on the device and thevolume is turned up.

To install Pandora:. On an Android™ phone or

Android Tablet, go to the AndroidMarket, and search for Pandora.Install to the phone, not to theSD card.

. On a BlackBerry® phone, go tothe BlackBerry App World™ andsearch for Pandora.

Launching Pandora

Connect the Android or BlackBerrythrough Bluetooth. See Bluetooth onpage 7-29. For first time use, set upstations before connecting to thevehicle. The Pandora icon will beavailable on the Home Page andthe source pop-up displays if thelatest application is installed on thedevice.

Using an Android Phone

1. Pair the phone using Bluetooth.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Launch the application on

the device.

. Press Pandora on theHome Page.

. Press b / g and say“Pandora” or “TunePandora.”

After Pandora has been launched,press Source or SRCE, or SRC onthe steering wheel controls toaccess Pandora features.

If nothing happens when theavailable Pandora screen button ispressed, download the latestPandora application and retry.

If the “Please See Device” messageis shown, the login screen maydisplay on the device.

Using a BlackBerry Phone

The phone must be unlocked. Tolaunch Pandora service:

1. Pair the BlackBerry phone usingBluetooth.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Launch the application on

the device.



. Press Pandora on theHome Page.

. Press b / g and say“Pandora” or “TunePandora.”

After Pandora has been launched,press Source or SRCE, or SRC onthe steering wheel controls toaccess Pandora features.

If nothing happens when theavailable Pandora screen button ispressed, download the latestPandora application and retry.


Pandora Menus

Press Menu on the Pandoramain page.

Pandora has a menu system withthe following:

Quickmix: Press to play thestations in random order.

User-Created Stations: Press toplay a user-created station.

Pandora Features

Pandora has features to rate tracks,skip tracks, or change stations.

} (Bookmarks): Press whileplaying a track to bookmark eitherthe track or the artist. Bookmarksare viewable on www.pandora.com.

, (Thumbs Down): Whenpressed, Pandora stores theinformation, changes to the nexttrack, and does not play the track onthis station again. This helpsPandora choose which tracksshould not play on this station. Thisfeature is only available on usercreated stations.



- (Thumbs Up): When pressed,Pandora stores this informationand- is highlighted for theremainder of the track. This helpsPandora choose which tracksshould play on this station.

d (Next Track): When pressed,Pandora changes to the next track.

k (Play/Pause): Press on theradio to pause playback. Pressagain to resume.

Pandora Skip Limit

Pandora limits the number of skipsallowed on their service. When theskip limit is reached,, will not skip

the currently playing track, but,feedback will be recorded.

Pandora Advertisement

Pandora may displayadvertisements. Artist name andtrack title will not be displayed andthe skip track button is notavailable.

Pandora Troubleshooting

Unable to Connect Device toVehicle

If the device is unable to connect:


2. Remove the key from theignition.

3. Open and close the driver door,wait about 30 seconds, and tryto connect the device again.

Unable to Start Pandora

If the device is unable to launchPandora:. Check that the latest version of

Pandora is installed.. Check that there is an active

account logged into Pandora.. Have at least one station

created.. Check that the device is paired

with the vehicle, and theBluetooth icon on the display ishighlighted.

. Close Pandora on the deviceand launch again. Devices thatallow multitasking may requirean extra step to quit the Pandoraapplication. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Thumbs Up or Thumbs DownError

If there is an error trying to rate atrack with the, or- buttons, themessage “Thumbs Down Error” or“Thumbs Up Error” will display.Press OK to retry.

Loss of Audio

Loss of Pandora audio can happenin different ways:. Weak or lost data connection.. Device needs to be charged.. Application needs to be

relaunched.. Connection between phone and

radio lost.. The volume is too low. Turn up

the volume on the device.



If the connection is lost between theapplication and device, a message“Please unlock your phone or restartthe phone app and try again” willdisplay. Press OK to retry.

Common Pandora Messages

Please See Device: When the useris not logged in or whenauthentication failed, see device.Press OK to continue.

Paused or Audio Paused:Playback is paused on radio ordevice. Pressk or play on thedevice.

No Stations Found: Logged in butno stations created. Press OK tocontinue.

Please Unlock Your Phone orRestart Phone App and TryAgain: Communication failurebetween the radio and the phoneapplication or device is locked.

See www.pandora.com/help formore information. If the service willnot work, see your dealer forassistance.

Stitcher Internet RadioStitcher SmartRadio® (if equipped)is an Internet radio service thatstreams news, sports, andentertainment shows through theaudio system. Create personalized,on-demand stations or discover newshows through Stitcher's presetstations. To set up an account,download the application from theAndroid Market or iTunes Store,or go to www.stitcher.com.

A phone or tablet with Internetconnection is required for thisapplication. Personal cell phonedata plans are used. Make sure thelatest version is installed on thedevice and the volume on thedevice is turned up.

BlackBerry phones are notsupported for this application.

To install Stitcher:. On an Android phone or Tablet

with Internet connection, go tothe Android Market, search forStitcher, and install to the phone,not to the SD card.

Launching Stitcher

Connect the Android throughBluetooth. See Bluetooth onpage 7-29. For first time use, set upthe stations before connecting to thevehicle. The Stitcher icon will beavailable on the Home Page andsource pop-up displays if the latestapplication is installed on thedevice.

Using an Android Phone

1. Pair the phone using Bluetooth.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Press the application on the

device.. Press Stitcher on the

Home Page.



. Press b / g and say“Stitcher” or “Tune Stitcher.”

3. If Stitcher does not beginplaying, select a category andthen a station.

After Stitcher has been launched,press Source or SRCE, or SRC onthe steering wheel controls toaccess Stitcher features.

If nothing happens when theavailable Stitcher screen button ispressed, download the latestStitcher application and retry.


Stitcher Menus

Press Menu on the Stitchermain page.

Stitcher has a menu system with thefollowing:

My Favorites: Displays a list offavorite stations and shows.

Select and store programs asfavorites on the device and thenaccess them through My Favorites.

Stitcher Station Categories:Displays categories by topic.

When a category then sub-categoryis selected, the radio will startplaying the first program in thatsub-category.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to bringup the first 24 stations of thatsub-category.

Current Station Playlist: Whilelistening to a show, turn the TUNE/MENU knob to display the menu listof shows available for the currentstation.

Stitcher Features

Stitcher service has features to rateor skip shows, or change stations.

q (Favorites): When pressed, thecurrent show is added to thefavorites station.



, (Thumbs Down): Whenpressed, Stitcher changes to thenext show. This helps Stitcherprovide a personalized listeningexperience.

- (Thumbs Up): When pressed,Stitcher stores this informationand- is highlighted for theremainder of the show. This helpsStitcher provide a personalizedlistening experience.

d (Next Show): When pressed,Stitcher changes to the next show.

k (Play/Pause): Press on theradio to pause playback. Pressagain to resume.

Stitcher Advertisement

Stitcher may displayadvertisements. Artist name and titlemay not be displayed and the skiptrack button is not available.

Stitcher Troubleshooting

Unable to Connect Device toVehicle

If the device is unable to connect:


2. Remove the key from theignition.

3. Open and close the driver door,wait about 30 seconds, and tryto connect the device again.

Unable to Start Stitcher

If the device is unable to launchStitcher:. Check that the latest version of

Stitcher is installed.. Check that there is an active

account logged into Stitcher.. Have at least one station

created.. Check that the device is paired

with the vehicle, and theBluetooth icon on the display ishighlighted.

. Close Stitcher on the device andlaunch again. Devices that allowmultitasking may require anextra step to quit the Stitcherapplication. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Loss of Audio

Loss of Stitcher audio can happendue to:. Weak or lost data connection.. Device needs to be charged.. Application needs to be

relaunched.. Connection between phone and

radio is lost.. The volume is too low. Turn up

the volume on the device.

If the connection is lost between theapplication and device, a message“Please unlock your phone or restartthe phone app and try again” willdisplay. Press OK to retry.



Common Stitcher Messages

Please Try Again Later: A generalerror has occurred. A dataconnection may be unavailable dueto a weak or lost signal or theStitcher service being temporarilydown. Press OK to continue.

Paused or Audio Paused:Playback is paused on radio ordevice. Pressk or play on thedevice.

Please See Device: When the useris not logged in or whenauthentication failed, see device.Press OK to continue. Disconnectthe phone from the radio and followthe Stitcher account login processon the phone.

No Stations Found: Logged in butno stations created. Press OK tocontinue.

Please Choose a New Station:The end of the station has beenreached and there is no morecontent to play. Select a new stationthrough the Stitcher menu.

Please Unlock Your Phone orRestart Phone App and TryAgain: Communication failurebetween the radio and the phoneapplication or device is locked.

See www.stitcher.com/help for moreinformation. If the service will notwork, send an e-mail [email protected] or see yourdealer for assistance.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3, unprotected WMA, and

AAC formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitymay be reduced due to the disc, themethod of recording, the quality ofthe music recorded, or how the dischas been handled.

There may be increased skipping,difficulty reading recorded tracks,finding tracks, and/or loading andejecting. If these problems occur,check the disc for damage or try aknown good disc.



To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the infotainment system on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, rightside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressZ to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.

Playing an Audio CD

1. Press the CD screen button onthe Home Page or select CDfrom the source pop-up todisplay the CD main page.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the menu options.

3. Press to select the option.

On the CD main page, the tracknumber displays and the Song,Artist, and Album informationdisplays when available.

Use the following radio controls toplay the disc:

J (Play/Pause): Use to pause orresume play.

© SEEK:. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forfewer than five seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.



¨ SEEK:. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

TUNE/MENU Knob: Turn to theright or left to select the next orprevious track. Press the knob toselect from the list. If a track isselected from the menu, the systemplays the track and returns to theCD screen.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be due to:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, trya known good CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing a CD orMP3 CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle: Press to play the tracksrandomly. Press again to stopshuffle.



Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Track List: Press to list all thetracks on the disc.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.

There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.



Auxiliary Devices

The USB and AUX features arepermanently disabled.

Bluetooth AudioIf equipped, music may be playedfrom a paired Bluetooth® device.See “Pairing a Phone/Device” underBluetooth on page 7-29.

To play music through a Bluetoothdevice:

1. Power on the device, pair, andconnect the device.

2. Music can be launched by doingone of the following:. Press the Bluetooth Audio

screen button on theHome Page.

. Press SRCE until BluetoothAudio is selected.

. Press the SRC button onthe steering wheel controlsuntil Bluetooth Audio isselected. See SteeringWheel Controls onpage 5-2.

. Use voice recognition. SeeVoice Recognition onpage 7-26.

The music can be controlled byeither the infotainment controls orthe controls on the device.

When a phone is connected to thesystem through Bluetooth Audio thephone notifications and sounds maynot be heard on the phone untilBluetooth is disconnected.Notification features may vary based

on the phone. Check the phonemanufacturer’s information fornotification support.

Bluetooth Audio Menu

Touch the Menu screen button andthe following may display:

Shuffle: Press the outer ring of theTUNE/MENU knob to turn shuffle onor off. Not all devices support theshuffle feature.

When selecting Bluetooth audio, theBluetooth device internal musicplayer may not open depending onthe status of the device. All deviceslaunch and play back audiodifferently. Make sure the correctaudio source is playing on thedevice for Bluetooth audio playbackon the infotainment system. Whenthe vehicle is not moving, use thedevice to begin playback.

When selecting Bluetooth audioas a source, the infotainmentsystem may display the BluetoothAudio Paused screen with no audioplaying. Press play on the device or



push J to begin playback. Thismay happen depending on how thedevice communicates overBluetooth.

Some phones support sendingBluetooth music information todisplay on the infotainment system.When the infotainment systemreceives this information, it willcheck to see if any album art isavailable and display it.

When playing music on theinfotainment system from aBluetooth device, make sure theBluetooth device is unlocked andthe intended music application isshowing on the home screen.

Voice RecognitionVoice recognition allows forhands-free operation of theinfotainment system features.

Voice recognition can be used whenthe infotainment system is on. Thesystem maintains a minimumvolume level.

Using Voice Recognition

1. Press b / g on the steeringwheel. The audio system mutes.A voice prompt states, “Pleasesay a command.” Wait until thetone is heard before speaking.

If there is no tone, make surethat the volume is turned up.

While voice recognition is active,the system displays a g symbolin the top right of the screen.

2. Clearly speak one of thecommands listed later in thissection.

Press b / g twice on the steeringwheel to skip the voice promptmessages.

Cancelling Voice Recognition

1. Press and release $ /i onthe steering wheel control tocancel a command, if the systemresponse does not match thevoice command, or say“Goodbye” or “Cancel.”

2. The system replies, “Goodbye.”

Helpful Hints for SpeakingCommands. When multiple commands are

available, choose the commandthat works best for you.

. Words in parentheses areoptional. For example, for thecommand “Tune FM(frequency),” saying “Tune FM87.7” or “Tune FM” are bothvalid commands.



. When the command isrecognized, the system willeither perform the function orask to confirm the choice.

. When the system does notrecognize the command, thesystem says “pardon.”

. If experiencing difficulty with thesystem recognizing a command,confirm that the command iscorrect. Try saying the commandclearly or wait for a brief momentafter the tone.

. Background noise such as aclimate control fan positioned onhigh, open windows, and veryloud outside noises, even if thewindows are closed, can causevoice commands to bemisunderstood.

. To increase or decrease thevoice volume during a voicerecognition session, turn thevolume switch of the radio,or press the volume steeringwheel control. If the volume isadjusted during a voice

recognition session, a Volumebar appears on the screenshowing the voice volume levelas it is being adjusted. This alsochanges the volume of theguidance prompts.

Voice Recognition Help

To enter the help playback session,clearly speak one of the helpcommands.

Help: The system plays back morespecific help commands such asRadio Settings for the user tochoose from.

Radio: Use this command to learnabout how to select a band (AM orFM), and how to change radiostations by speaking frequencynumbers.

Phone: Use this command to learnabout how to dial, pair a device,or delete a device.

My Media: Use this command tolearn how to play specific tracks,artists, albums, or to changesources.

Settings: Use this command tolearn about how to turn Verbose onor off, or set the language.

Voice Recognition Commands

The following list shows the voicecommands available for theinfotainment system with a briefdescription of each. The commandsare listed with the optional words inparentheses. To use the voicecommands, see the previousinstructions.

Radio Commands

Tune AM or Tune FM: Instructs thesystem to go to the specific bandand the last station.

Tune AM (frequency) or Tune FM(frequency): Instructs the systemto go to the specific station.

Thumbs Up: Instructs the systemto give the current song or station athumbs up in Pandora or Stitcher.



Thumbs Down: Instructs thesystem to give the current song orstation a thumbs down in Pandoraor Stitcher.

Phone Commands

Dial or Call (phone number orcontact): Instructs the system tostart a phone call. For example, say“Dial 1234 5678.” To call a phonebook contact, say “Dial” or “Call,”say the name and location, and thensay “Dial.” For example, say “CallJohn at Home” or “Call John atWork.” If a number is notrecognized, the first number in thelist will be called.

Pair or Connect: Instructs thesystem to begin pairing a device.

Digit Dial: Instructs the system todial a phone number one digit at atime. After saying the digits,say “Dial.”

Redial or Redial Last Number:Instructs the system to dial the lastphone number called.

Select Device or Change Phone:Instructs the system to switch to adifferent paired device. The devicemust be selected from the screen orusing the TUNE/MENU knob.

Delete Device: Instructs thesystem to delete a paired device.

My Media Commands

CD or Bluetooth Audio: Instructsthe system to change the source.

Play CD: Instructs the system toplay a CD. For example, say“Play CD.”

Settings Commands

Verbose (set) on (mode), Verbose(set) off (mode): Instructs thesystem to turn voice prompts on oroff. When off, this feature turns offvoice prompts.

List Devices: Instructs the systemto give a list of devices to use.

Other Commands

Goodbye: Instructs the system toend a phone call or voicerecognition.

Cancel: Instructs the system tocancel an action.

Go Back, Back, Previous:Instructs the system to go back to aprior menu.

Main Menu: Instructs the system togo to the main menu.

Yes, Yep, Yup, Ya, Sure, Right,Correct, OK, Positive, You Got it,Probably, You Bet: These can beused to say “Yes.”

No, Nope, Na, No way, Wrong,Incorrect, Negative, Not really, NoI said, No I Did Not, No I Do Not:These can be used to say “No.”

Next Page, Page Down: Instructsthe system to scroll forward onepage in a list.

Previous Page, Page Up: Instructsthe system to scroll back one pagein a list.



Phone

Bluetooth

Overview

If equipped with Bluetooth capability,the system can interact with manymobile phones and devices,allowing:. Placing and receiving hands-free

calls.. Sharing of the mobile phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle. The phone book willonly display when that phone isconnected.

. Placing outgoing calls by voicerecognition.

The system can be used while theinfotainment system is on. Therange of the Bluetooth system canbe up to 9.1 m (30 ft). The radio canconnect to most Bluetooth-enabledphones. Available features andfunctions may be dependent on thedevice.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Bluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls and startvoice recognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, decline an incoming call,or cancel voice recognition.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7-2.

v /> (Phone/Mute): Press to enterthe Phone main menu. Press andhold to mute or unmute.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

When using voice recognition:. The system may not recognize

voice commands if there is toomuch background noise.

. A tone sounds to indicate thatthe system is ready for a voicecommand. Wait for the tone andthen speak.

. Speak clearly in a calm andnatural voice.

See Voice Recognition onpage 7-26.

Audio System

Sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/O knob during a call to changethe volume level. The adjustedvolume level remains in memory forlater calls. The system maintains aminimum volume level.



See Voice Recognition onpage 7-26.

Bluetooth Audio

See Bluetooth Audio on page 7-25.

Pairing with InfotainmentControls

A Bluetooth-enabled mobile phonemust be paired and then connectedto the vehicle before it can be used.See your mobile phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe mobile phone.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth-enabled phone and

an audio playback device can bepaired to the system at thesame time.

. Up to five devices can be pairedto the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the mobilephone changes or the mobilephone is deleted from thesystem.

. Only one paired mobile phonecan be connected to theBluetooth system at a time.

. If multiple paired mobile phonesare within range of the system,the radio will connect to the firstphone in the list or to the phonethat was previously connected.

Pairing a Phone/Device

1. Press CONFIG or Press Configon the Home Page or pressv />.

2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device. Theinfotainment system displays“Pairing Code: XXXX”. Confirmor enter number:” If the devicesupports a four-digit Personal

Identification Number (PIN), itwill display. The PIN is used inStep 6.

5. Start the pairing process on themobile phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the mobile phonemanufacturer's user guide.

6. Locate and select the devicenamed Mylink in the list on themobile phone. Follow theinstructions on the mobile phoneto enter the PIN provided inStep 4, or to confirm the six-digitcode matches. The systemrecognizes the new connectedphone after the pairing processis complete.

7. If the phone prompts to acceptconnection or allow phone bookdownload, select always acceptand allow. The phone book maynot be available if not accepted.Some phones will putconnection request orphonebook request in a pulldown task bar at the top of the



screen. Drag down the task barand look for connection/phonebook request and accept.

8. Repeat to pair additionalphones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones/Devices

1. Press CONFIG, Press Config onthe Home Page and selectPhone, or press v />.



4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone/Device





5. Select the phone to delete,select Delete and follow thescreen prompts.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different phone, thenew phone must be in the vehicleand available to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to connectto and follow the screenprompts.

Pairing with Voice Recognition

A Bluetooth-enabled mobile phonemust be paired and then connectedto the vehicle before it can be used.See the mobile phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe mobile phone.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Please Say aCommand,” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith “Please search forBluetooth devices on yourphone, select your vehicle,confirm or enter the PIN numberprovided on the screen.”

3. Start the search for Bluetoothdevices on the phone. Thenselect the device and follow theinstructions on the phone byeither entering the four-digit PINor confirming the six-digitpasscode. The PIN is used inStep 4.

4. Locate and select the devicenamed after the vehicle makeand model in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the mobile phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3 or toconfirm the six-digit codematches. The system responds“successfully paired.”



5. Repeat Steps 1–4 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all mobilephones paired to it. If a pairedmobile phone is also connected tothe vehicle, the system respondswith “is connected” after thatphone name.


2. Say “List Device.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name to delete isunknown, see “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones.”


2. Say “Delete Device.”

3. The system responds with: “Todelete a device, please select itsname from the list.” Select thedevice to delete on the displayand it will be removed.

To cancel this command,press $ /i on the steering wheel

control or press the BACK/ button.

Connecting to a Different Phoneor Device

To connect to a different mobilephone, the system looks for the nextavailable mobile phone. Dependingon the mobile phone to beconnected, this command may needto be repeated.


2. Say “Change Phone.”. To select a device, press

the name on the display.. If another mobile phone is

not found, the originalphone remains connected.

Making a Call Using PhoneBook and InfotainmentControls

For mobile phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon the mobile phone to make calls.See the mobile phonemanufacturer‘s user guide orcontact the wireless provider to findout if this feature is supported.

When a mobile phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allowsaccess to the phone book stored inthe mobile phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows accessto the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on the mobilephone to make a call.



The radio will display the first 1,000contacts and the phone numbers foreach contact including Home, Work,Mobile, and Other.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press v /> or touch the Phonescreen button.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Select the letter group of thephone book entry to scrollthrough the list of names/numbers.

4. Select the name.

5. Select the number to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or numberto call.

5. Select Call.

Making a Call Using theInfotainment Controls

To make a call:


2. Touch Enter number.

3. Enter the phone number.

4. Select OK to start dialling thenumber.

To make a call using voicerecognition, see “Making a Call”under Hands-Free Phone onpage 7-35.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Using the Infotainment Controls

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” or “Decline” and press theTUNE/MENU knob or touch Acceptor Decline on the screen.

Using Steering Wheel Controls

Press b / g to answer or $ /i todecline the call.

Call Waiting Using theInfotainment Controls

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls turn andpress the TUNE/MENU knob andselect Switch Call or touch SwitchCall on the screen.



Call Waiting Using SteeringWheel Controls

Call waiting must be supported onthe mobile phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To decline answering theincoming call, touch Decline onthe screen or take no action.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Conference Calling Using theInfotainment Controls

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by the

wireless service carrier to work. Thisfeature is only supported when thevehicle is not moving.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Select Enter Number.

2. Enter the phone number andselect OK.

3. After the call has been placed,turn the TUNE/MENU knob andchoose Merge Calls.

4. To add more callers to theconference call, repeatSteps 1−3. The number ofcallers that can be added islimited by your wireless servicecarrier.

Ending a Call


Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob to select Hang Up, or pressHang Up on the screen.

Using Steering Wheel Controls

Press $ /i.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.


Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob to select Mute Call. Selectagain to cancel mute.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and themobile phone.

The mobile phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred.



To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a MobilePhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle, touch the Transfer Callbutton on the screen or press andhold the b /g button on the steeringwheel.

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Mobile Phone

Use the audio transfer feature onthe mobile phone. See your mobilephone manufacturer's user guide formore information. Press theTransfer to Handset button on thescreen or press and hold the b /gbutton on the steering wheel.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.


1. Select Enter Number.

2. Select the digits on the screenthen press OK to send.

Hands-Free Phone

Using Bluetooth VoiceRecognition

To use voice recognition, pressthe b / g button on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while in a voice recognition menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: These commands canbe used interchangeably to dial aphone number.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command dials thelast number used on the cell phone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command

To call a number:


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. The system respondswith the entered number.

4. Say “Dial” or “Call”.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

To call using a name tag:


2. Say “Dial” or “Call” and then saythe name tag. For example “CallJohn at Work.”




Using the “Digit Dial” Command

This allows a phone number to bedialed by entering the digits one ata time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time, todial. After each digit is entered,the system repeats back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.After the last digit has beenentered, say “Dial.”

If an unwanted number is repeatedback, say “Clear” to clear the lastnumber.


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe vehicle Bluetooth system, it willbe retained. This includes phonepairing information. For directionson how to delete this information,see “Deleting a Paired Phone/Device.”

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-10.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.



Gracenote

Gracenote®, Gracenote logo andlogotype, and the "Powered byGracenote" logo are either aregistered trademark or a trademarkof Gracenote, Inc. in the UnitedStates and/or other countries.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. Air Conditioning

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls


8-2 Climate Controls

5. Front Defrost

6. ZONE

7. Passenger Temperature Control

8. Recirculation

9. Fan Control

10. Rear Window Defogger

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When thisbutton is pressed, the systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery mode,the air conditioning compressor, andthe fan speed. When AUTO appearsin the display, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If any of thecontrols are manually adjusted, theAUTO indicator turns off in thedisplay.

1. Press the AUTO button, if theAUTO indicator does not appearon the display.

2. Adjust the temperature to acomfortable setting.

3. Adjust the air outlets as desired.

4. Let the system stabilize for a fewminutes.

In cold weather, the system will limitthe blower speed until the enginehas warmed up.

Do not cover the solar sensor in thecenter of the instrument panel, nearthe windshield. See “Sensors” laterin this section.

The automatic climate controlsystem may not work as desired ifone or more of the instrument paneloutlets are closed.

Manual Operation

On/Off: Press9 to turn thesystem on or off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. The fanspeed appears on the infotainmentdisplay.

Press the AUTO button to return toautomatic operation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Turn the temperaturecontrols clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature.

The temperature setting between21°C (70°F) and 23°C (74°F) isrecommended.

The temperature settings for eachside are shown in the temperaturecontrol knob displays and theinfotainment display. If thetemperature control is past 30°C(86°F), the display shows HI(hottest). Turning it past 16°C(61°F), shows LO (coolest).

ZONE: Press to synchronize thedriver and passenger temperatures.

Single-Zone Mode: All zones areset to the same temperature. “Driverhas control” will be displayed on theinfotainment display. Turn the drivertemperature control to adjust thesystem temperature.



Dual-Zone Mode: Allows differenttemperatures to be set for the driverand passenger sides.

Enter Dual-Zone mode by adjustingthe passenger side temperaturewhen in Single-Zone mode.

Air Delivery Mode Controls:PressY,),-, or[ to changethe current airflow mode. Thecurrent mode selection appears inthe display screen. Changing themode cancels the automaticoperation and the system goes intosemi-automatic operation. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Select from the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets andconsole outlet.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets, console outlet and the flooroutlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the outer instrument panel,windshield, and side window outlets.

- (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield, floor and side windowoutlets. Use this mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers.

5 FRONT (Defrost): Pressto turn the defrost on or off.The5 FRONT indicator appears inthe display. A portion of the air isdirected to the windshield and sidewindow outlets, with some airdirected to the outer instrumentpanel outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. The# appears on theinfotainment display when the air

conditioning is on. When the airconditioning is turned off,# OFFappears on the infotainment display.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture and heat fromthe air.

The air conditioning mightautomatically turn off during heavyacceleration, abnormal systempressure or very cold outsidetemperatures.

Recirculation

h (Recirculation): Press tochange the air intake betweenrecirculated air and outside air.happears on the infotainment displaywhen recirculation is activated.

The recirculation mode recyclesinterior air and is not recommendedfor extended use. If it is used for along period of time, the systemautomatically lets some outside airinto the vehicle for ventilation.

Do not use the recirculation mode ifoccupants are smoking.



The recirculation mode cannot beturned on in defrost mode.

AUTOh is displayed when thesystem is automatically controllingthe combination of outside andrecirculated air for bestperformance.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window. It only workswhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

+ REAR (Rear WindowDefogger): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Theindicator on the button turns on. Therear window defogger turns offautomatically if it is left on.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna or

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

defogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Heated Mirrors: If equipped withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2-13.

Sensors

The automatic climate controlsystem uses sensors to maintaintemperatures. The solar sensor ison the instrument panel near thewindshield, and the outsidetemperature sensor is in front of theradiator.

The solar sensor monitors the solarradiation when operating in AUTOmode, adjusting the temperature,fan speed and air delivery.

The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be activated, as necessary.

The outside temperature sensor canbe affected by radiant heat whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To prevent false temperaturereadings, the displayed temperaturewill not update at low vehiclespeeds.

If the vehicle has been turned off forless than four hours, thetemperature at start up will berecalled from previous operation.

Do not cover the sensors; otherwisethe automatic climate control systemwill not work properly.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, when it is activated, theclimate control system will use theprevious settings. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-5.



Regular Operation

Adjusting the Temperature

When the climate control systemhas stabilized, adjust thetemperature to a comfortablesetting.

Quick Cool Down

When entering the vehicle on a hotday, open the windows for a shorttime to allow the hot air to escape.

Automatic Transmission

If the vehicle is stopped for a longtime in hot weather and the engineis running and the air conditioning isoperating, move the shift lever toN (Neutral) or P (Park).

A/C Sound

A slight hissing sound when the airconditioning is turned off is normal.

Water Condensation

Water may drip from underneath thevehicle, this is normal.

Unsealed Dusty Roads

To help prevent dust from enteringyour vehicle:. When following other vehicles

on dusty roads and the dust isairborne, selecth.

. If the dust is not airborne, selectoutside air and set the fancontrol to high speed.

. Close all windows.

. Do not use recirculation for longperiods of time.

Air Vents

The air outlets have adjustablevanes that move up or down and leftor right to change the direction ofthe airflow. Use the thumbwheelslocated near the air outlets on theinstrument panel to shut off theairflow.



Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectperformance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe vehicle has a passengercompartment air filter that filters theoutside air entering the vehicle. Thefilter removes contaminants, suchas pollen and dust. See your dealerfor more information about filterreplacement.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-8Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-18

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-19

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-24

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-26

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Driver Assistance SystemsRear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-33Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-5.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.



. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.



If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Service VehicleMessages on page 5-25. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-40.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-24.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-22.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-4.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems.”

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-18.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-24.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-72.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center



pillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10-40 andTire Pressure on page 10-48.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

This vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and



seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labeltells the gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,

fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InUse the following precautions toimprove performance:. For the first 1000 km (621 mi):

Do not make full throttle starts.

Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

Do not drive at any one constantspeed.

Use moderate acceleration inlower gears.

Avoid vehicle speeds above110 km/h (68 mph).

. Between the first 1000 km(621 mi) and 5000 km (3,107 mi),heavy acceleration in lowergears may be used.

Vehicle speeds above 110 km/h(68 mph) should be limited tofive minutes per use.

If equipped, see Vehicle SpeedLimiter - SEO SGT onpage 15-15.

. Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 350 km (217 mi) to avoidpremature wear and earlyreplacement of brakes.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.



To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the regularbrake pedal applied.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

This position locks the steeringwheel, ignition, and transmission.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto OFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition switch to the OFFposition.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-23.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.



2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

3 (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

4 (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2-1.

If the vehicle stalls afterfive seconds, return the key to theLOCK position. Slowly rotate thekey to the START position. If thesecurity warning lamp flashes,contact your dealer.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the vehiclewhen it is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-36.



Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine warms. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Allow the oil to warmup and lubricate all movingparts.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°C

or 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key or button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The power windows will operatewhen the key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY positions.

Once the ignition is turned off, RAPallows the power windows tocontinue to operate for up to10 minutes. If a door is openedduring this time, they will bedeactivated.

The audio system will bedeactivated only if the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into ParkUse this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9-23for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as itwill go.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-16.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the lever and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe transmission has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The key must be in the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedalpressed so the shift lever can bemoved from the P (Park) position.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-23.

3. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

4. Pull the shift lever toward you.

5. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpull the shift lever again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

6.0L V8

This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-16and Engine Exhaust on page 9-18.

AutomaticTransmission

Gear positions are indicated on theinstrument panel.



The engine will not start unless theshift lever is in P (Park) orN (Neutral).

P (Park): This position locks thewheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-16.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever pulled before shifting fromP (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Then

pull the shift lever and move theshift lever into another gear. SeeShifting out of Park on page 9-17.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-8.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.



{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy.

{ Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.

L (Low): In this position thetransmission will shift to a low gear.

It provides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).

Use on very steep hills or in deepsnow or mud.

{ Caution

Do not use the accelerator pedalto hold the vehicle stationary onan uphill slope. Use the brakes.

Sport Shift Mode

The Sport Shift button is to the leftof the steering column.

Sport Shift mode can be selectedwhere maximum responsiveness isrequired.

When operated in Sport Shift mode,the transmission will delay upshiftsand allow earlier downshifts.

In addition, the transmission cansense enthusiastic driving, at whichpoint it may delay upshifting and



downshift earlier when braking. Thisis designed to maximize vehicleperformance.

To activate Sport Shift mode:

1. Press the Sport Shift button.

SPORT MODE ON is displayedon the DIC, and the sport shiftindicator illuminates. See SportMode Light on page 5-14.

2. To return to Normal Shift mode,press the Sport Shift buttonagain.

SPORT MODE OFF is displayedon the DIC, and the sport shiftindicator turns off.

On the bottom of the display, Sappears as long as Sport Shiftmode is selected.

Normal Shift Mode

Normal Shift mode is recommendedfor normal or freeway driving, as itprovides optimum fuel economy.

When the shift lever is moved toD Drive, Normal Shift mode isselected.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-14.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle



suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal is to theleft of the brake pedal, near thedriver door.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push theparking brake pedal down to its fullyapplied position.

If the ignition is on, the parkingbrake light will come on. SeeParking Brake Light on page 5-14.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the parkingbrake light will flash and a chime willsound warning you that the parkingbrake is still on.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the parking brakelight will go off.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a gradesufficient enough to activate HSA.This feature is designed to preventthe vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicledrive off. After the driver completelystops and holds the vehicle in acomplete standstill on a grade, HSAwill be automatically activated.During the transition period betweenwhen the driver releases the brakepedal and starts to accelerate todrive off on a grade, HSA holds thebraking pressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system brakes thespinning wheel(s) and/or reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but It may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-8 and “Turning the SystemsOff and On” later in this section.



The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC),and d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. if d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problemIf the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe TCS/StabiliTrak button ispressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until the traction off light iand StabiliTrak OFF light g comeon and stay on in the instrumentcluster.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button. The traction offlight i and StabiliTrak OFF light gin the instrument cluster turn off.



Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

StabiliTrak/TCSPerformance Mode

The StabiliTrak/TCS system can beplaced into the Performance modeby pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button. This mode allowsincreased performance whileaccelerating and/or cornering. Thisis accomplished by regulating andoptimizing engine and brakeperformance.

The TCS/StabiliTrak OFF light willcome on. The messagePERFORMANCE MODE will appearmomentarily in the DIC to indicatethat the Performance mode has

been entered. The display will thenreturn to the previous page. Toreturn the system to StabiliTrak,press the TCS/StabiliTrak button.The TCS/StabiliTrak OFF light willturn off and the StabiliTrak systemwill come back on.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.For vehicles with limited slipdifferential, driven under severeconditions, the rear axle fluid shouldbe changed. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control will automatically



disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-24. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

1 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.A white indicator comes on in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate): Ifthere is a set speed in memory,move the thumbwheel up briefly toresume to that speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If 1 is on when not in use, the SET/- or RES/+ could get bumped andgo into cruise when not desired.Keep 1 off when cruise control isnot being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press 1.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-6.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-19. The incrementvalue used depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, move thethumbwheel toward SET/−briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-19. The incrementvalue used depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previouslyset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly moving thethumbwheel toward SET/– will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. If the brake pedal isapplied, cruise control willdisengage.



Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off the cruise control,press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in ON/RUN and the drivershifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),the video image automaticallyappears on the infotainment screen.The infotainment screen goes to theprevious screen after approximatelyfour seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object located outside thecamera's field of view, below the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bumper, or under the vehicle.Perceived distances may bedifferent from actual distances.Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen. Failure touse proper care before backingmay result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Always checkbehind and around the vehiclebefore backing.

To see the previous screen sooner,do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).



Guidelines

The RVC system may have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Rear Camera Options.

4. Select Guidelines. The feature ison when a check mark appearsnext to it.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay on the infotainment screenwhen the system is not workingproperly.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. Displayed imagesmay be further or closer than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel onpage 9-33.

For vehicles with a V6 engine, useregular unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.Do not use gasoline with an octanerating below 87, as it may causeengine damage and will lower fueleconomy.

For vehicles with a V8 engine, usepremium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher.Regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher can be used,but acceleration and fuel economywill be reduced, and an audibleknocking noise may be heard. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at91 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 91 octane rating orhigher, the engine needs service.



Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-10. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S., the proper fuelmight be hard to find. Checkregional auto club or fuel retailbrand websites for availability in thecountry where driving. Never useleaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-31.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel on page 9-31.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/.

E85 or FlexFuel should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCAN/CGSB-3.512 in Canada.

Do not use the fuel if the ethanolcontent is greater than 85%. Fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTM orCGSB specifications can affectdriveability and could cause themalfunction indicator lamp tocome on.

If equipped with a V6 engine, thestarting characteristics of E85 orFlexFuel make it unsuitable for usewhen temperatures fall below -18°C(0°F). Use gasoline or add gasolineto the E85 or FlexFuel.

After refueling, the vehicledetermines the composition of thefuel. It is not recommended torepeatedly switch between gasolineand E85 or FlexFuel. If the fuels areswitched frequently, add as muchfuel as possible and do not add lessthan 11 L (3 gal) when refueling.Drive at least 11 km (7 mi)immediately after refueling to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.



Because E85 has less energy perliter (gallon) than gasoline, thevehicle will need to be refueledmore often. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-34.

{ Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way.



The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks, otherwisethe malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-10.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-73.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-10.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-10.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-34 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-34.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57


10-2 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-68Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-69

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-72Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-9.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-11.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.


10-4 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is located below the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

2. Push up on the secondary hoodrelease and lift the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

3.6L V6 Engine


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-32.

2. Coolant Recovery Reservoir andDipstick Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-13.

3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

4. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

7. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

9. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10-20.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-20.

11. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.


Vehicle Care 10-7

6.0L V8 Engine


10-8 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-32.

2. Coolant Recovery Reservoir andDipstick Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-13.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

6. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

7. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

9. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10-20.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-20.

11. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.


Vehicle Care 10-9

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

V6 Engine

V8 Engine

If the oil is in the cross-hatched addarea at the tip of the dipstick for theV6 engine or at the lower mark atthe tip of the dipstick for theV8 engine, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5

Add enough oil to reach the uppercross-hatched area for theV6 engine or at the upper mark onthe dipstick for the V8 engine. Pushthe dipstick all the way back inwhen through.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oil


Vehicle Care 10-11

from the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-24.

Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-19.

2. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton on the DIC while the OilLife display is active. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.


10-12 Vehicle Care

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealerservice department. Contact yourdealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase a

service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-9.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it when required. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe front of the driver side of theengine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5.


Vehicle Care 10-13

6.0L V8 Engine Shown, 3.6LV6 Engine Similar

3. Remove the airflow sensorconnector by pushing in the taband pulling straight back.

4. Open the five retaining clips onthe air filter housing.

5. Pull straight up on the cover;while holding the cover, removethe air filter.

6. Install the air filter.

7. Close the air filter housing coverand clip the five retaining clips.

8. Push in the airflow sensorconnector.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling System

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Coolant Recovery Reservoir2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out

of View)3. Radiator Cap


10-14 Vehicle Care

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Coolant Recovery Reservoir2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out

of View)3. Radiator Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-18.


Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or pouring it intosewers, streams or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.


10-16 Vehicle Care

To check coolant:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Locate the coolant recoveryreservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

3. Turn the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick capcounterclockwise and slowly pullout the dipstick. There aremaximum and minimummarkings on the dipstick.

4. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be at orabove the minimum mark (1).After the vehicle has been drivenand the engine is at normaloperating temperature, the levelshould be somewhere betweenhalf full and the maximummark (2).

5. If the coolant level is correct,replace the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick cap and turnclockwise to secure.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Bottle

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

To add coolant:

1. Turn the engine coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick capcounterclockwise 1/8 of a turnand slowly pull out the dipstick.


Vehicle Care 10-17

2. Pour the coolant into the enginecoolant recovery reservoir.

3. When the level is correct, as perthe markings on the dipstick,replace the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick cap and turnclockwise to secure.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They are

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

under pressure, and if you turnthe radiator cap— even alittle— they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including theradiator cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and radiator capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the enginecoolant recovery reservoir, addcoolant as follows:

1. Locate the radiator cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5.


10-18 Vehicle Care

2. Cover the radiator cap with athick cloth and turn it slowlycounterclockwise and remove.

3. If there is no coolant visible orthe level is low, slowly fill thesystem through the radiator capopening with a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off if the leveldrops.

Do not spill coolant on theaccessory drive belts.

If a spill occurs, rinse the beltwith fresh water.

4. Start the engine.

5. With the engine idling, top off thecoolant through the radiator capopening until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off if the leveldrops.

6. Once the system is full, put theradiator cap back on by turningclockwise.

7. Turn the engine off.

8. Check the coolant level in theengine coolant recoveryreservoir and fill it until the levelis at the top mark on the dipstickcap. Filling to this level providesadditional coolant to allow forany air that may be left in thecooling system.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-4.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe windshield washer fluid reservoiris full. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for reservoirlocation.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The braking

performance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 4 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake

hydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-13.


10-22 Vehicle Care

What to Add

Use only new DOT 4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brakehydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT 4 fluid at aregular maintenance service everytwo years. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

The battery is in the trunk, behind atrim panel, on the driver side of thevehicle. If the vehicle has theauxiliary battery option K5S, theauxiliary battery is in the trunk,behind a trim panel on thepassenger side of the vehicle. Referto the replacement number shownon the original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ Warning

A specifically developed batterywith a ventilation system isrequired for this vehicle. Anyother standard battery may causeexplosive gases to enter the trunkor passenger compartment.

Do not remove the caps on thetop of the battery. The batterysupplied in the vehicle ismaintenance free and does notrequire checking or filling.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-23

Warning (Continued)

The battery vent tube must beinstalled correctly to ensure theexplosive gases are ventedoutside the vehicle.

Only use a manufacturerrecommended battery as areplacement.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-69 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak or you hear

an unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

1. Drain Plug Hole2. Fill Plug Hole

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.


10-24 Vehicle Care

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of thefiller plug hole.

What to Use

To add lubricant when the level islow or to completely refill afterdraining, see Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-9. Thenfill to the bottom of the fill plug holewith the required lubricant.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).


Vehicle Care 10-25

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For the proper typeand size, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-10.

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs on each sideof the wiper blade assembly andslide the assembly off the end ofthe wiper arm.


10-26 Vehicle Care

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe tabs are fully set in thelocked position.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

4. Repeat the steps for the otherblade.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-31.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, see yourdealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Headlamps

1. Front Turn Signal Lamp2. Parking Lamp3. Low-Beam Headlamp4. High-Beam Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs:


2. For the passenger side, pull upon the coolant recovery reservoirfiller neck to remove it.

Let the filler neck drain beforepulling it all the way out. Place aclean towel over the opening ofthe coolant recovery reservoirafter removing it.

3. For the driver side, remove theair cleaner/filter cover. Move thecover to the back.


10-28 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the dust capcounterclockwise to remove.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull it out to remove it fromthe lamp assembly.

6. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

7. Install the new bulb into the lampassembly.

8. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector to the bulb.

9. Replace the dust cap.

10. For the driver side, reinstall theair cleaner/filter cover.

11. For the passenger side,reinstall the coolant recoveryreservoir filler neck.

Front Turn Signal Lamp


2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Push and turn the bulbcounterclockwise and remove.

4. Push the new bulb in and turn itclockwise to lock it into place.

5. Push the bulb socket and turn itclockwise to lock it into place.

Parking Lamp


2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.


Vehicle Care 10-29

4. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

5. Push the bulb socket and turn itclockwise to lock it into place.

Taillamps

1. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal

2. Back-up Lamp

For any lamp not listed here, seeyour dealer to replace.

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2-9.

2. Remove the rubber trunkfloor mat.

3. Raise the spare tire cover. SeeTire Changing on page 10-63.

4. Remove the lower push pins andturn the upper hooks securingthe plastic trunk trimcounterclockwise to remove.

5. Pull the trunk trim straight up toremove.

6. Remove the trunk lining byturning the securing pinscounterclockwise and pullingdown at the same time.

7. Lower the spare tire cover.

8. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the rear lamp housing.

9. Pull the bulb straight out toremove it from the bulb socket.

10. Push the new bulb into thesocket.


10-30 Vehicle Care

11. Push the bulb socket straight inand turn it clockwise to lock itinto place.

12. Raise the spare tire cover.

13. Push the trunk lining securingpins back into their holes.

14. Install the plastic trunk trim toits original location.

15. Reinstall the plastic retainingpins and hooks.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Press the spring clip on the leftend of the lamp assembly to theright to unlock the lampassembly.

2. Pull down on the lamp assemblyto remove it from the fascia.

3. Turn the bulb socket (3)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (1).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (3).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket (3)and turn the bulb socketclockwise to install into the lampassembly (1).

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly (1)into the fascia by inserting theright side first.

7. Push the spring clip side intoplace.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp W16W

FrontParking Lamp

W5WLL

Front TurnSignal Lamp

H21W

High-BeamHeadlamp

H7

LicensePlate Lamp

W5WLL

Low-BeamHeadlamp

H11

Stop/Turn/Taillamp W21/5W LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-32 Vehicle Care

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Spare fuses of various ratings areprovided in the EngineCompartment Fuse Block and RearCompartment Fuse Block.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

To access the engine compartmentfuse block, remove the clip-oncover.

Ensure the cover is replacedsecurely.


Vehicle Care 10-33

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

F1 Heated Mirrors

F2 Not Used

F3 Rear Defogger

F4 Not Used

F5 Spot Lamp Right

F6 Driver Power Seat

F7 Washer Pump

F8 Passenger Power Seat

F9 EMER/VEH/FT/LP

F10 Not Used

F11 Driving Lamps

F12 Headlamp Washer

F13 Spot Lamp Left

F14 ABS Pump

F15 ABS Valves

F16 Not Used


10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F17 Not Used

F18 Heated Front Seats

F19 Not Used

F20 Not Used

F21 Front PassengerWindow Switch

F22 Rear Wiper

F23 Sunroof

F24 Front Wipers

F25 Automatic OccupantSensing/InstrumentCluster Ignition

F26 LRBEC Ignition

F27 Not Used

F28 Ignition/InjectorsEven – V8

F29 Engine ControlModule-V8, IgnitionOdd-V6/EMIS

F30 Not Used

Fuses Usage

F31 Not Used

F32 Fog Lamps

F33 Ignition-IP/BODY

F34 Fuel System ControlModule Ignition

F35 Not Used

F36 ESCL

F37 EMIS 2/Ignition Even– V6

F38 Engine ControlModule-V6, Injectors/Ignition Odd – V8

F39 INCLR Pump

F40 Not Used

F41 Transmission ControlModule/Electric PowerSteering

F42 Starter Motor

F43 Not Used

F44 Left HID Headlamp

Fuses Usage

F45 Right HID Headlamp

F46 Left and RightHigh-Beam Headlamp

F47 Horn

F48 Engine Cooling Fan

F49 Automatic HeadlampLeveling

F50 Transmission ControlModule Ignition

F51 Engine Control ModuleIgnition

F52 Brake Vacuum Pump

F53 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

F54 Vaporizer ControlModule

Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Driving Lamps

R2 Headlamp Washer


Vehicle Care 10-35

Relays Usage

R3 Rear Washer Pump

R4 Front Washer Pump

R5 Rear Defogger

R6 Front Wiper Control

R7 Wiper Speed

R8 Engine ControlModule

R9 Not Used

R10 INCLR Pump

R11 Not Used

R12 Rear Wiper Control

R13 Fog Lamps

R14 Low-BeamHeadlamps

R15 High-BeamHeadlamps

R16 Starter

R17 Run/Crank

R18 Brake Vacuum Pump

Relays Usage

R19 Air ConditioningControl

R20 Horn

Relays R3, R4, R12, R13, and R20are PCB mounted relays.

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

Removing the Fuse Block Cover

Insert a flat bladed tool in the slotindicated and remove the fuse panelcover.

Replacing the Fuse Block Cover

1. Insert the rear edge of the fusepanel cover under the door seal.

2. Locate the hooks on the coverinto the end of the instrumentpanel.

3. Rotate and push the cover backinto position.


10-36 Vehicle Care


Fuses

Fuses Usage

F1 Body ControlModule 1

F2 Diagnostic LinkConnector

F3 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid


F5 Ignition Switch

F6 Electric SteeringControl Lock

CB7 Not Used

F8 Not Used

F9 Not Used

F10 Not Used

F11 Shunt 1


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fuses Usage

F12 Airbag/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

F13 Instrument Cluster

F14 HVAC Control Module

F15 Rain Sensor


F17 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid

F18 Not Used

F19 SWC Backlight

F20 Not Used

F21 Not Used

F22 Shunt 2




Fuses Usage

CB26 Not Used


F28 Blower Fan

F29 Accessories


Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Logistics

R2 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid 1

R3 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid 2

Rear Compartment FuseBlockThe fuse panel is on the left side ofthe trunk, above the battery.

. Turn the latch counterclockwiseto remove the cover.

. Replace the cover and rotate thelatch clockwise to secure.


10-38 Vehicle Care


Fuses

Fuses Usage

F1 Driver Front/Left RearWindow

F2 EMER/VEH/ACCY

F3 Trunk Release

F4 Passive Entry PassiveStart-BATT 2

F5 Radio

F6 Not Used

F7 Not Used

F8 Fuel System ControlModule

F9 MRTD

F10 Decklid Flashing Lamps/EDI Module

F11 Auxiliary Battery

F12 Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-39

Fuses Usage

F13 Not Used

F14 Rear Seat Entertainment

F15 Automatic HeadlampLeveling

F16 Not Used

F17 Exhaust Valve

F18 OnStar

F19 Mirror/Window Module

F20 Canister Vent Solenoid

F21 Passive Entry PassiveStart-BATT 1

F22 Memory Seat Module

F23 Amplifier

F24 Passenger Front/RightRear Window

F25 Electric Parking Brake

F26 Tailgate Module

F27 Camera Ignition

F28 Front Vent Seat Ignition

Fuses Usage

F29 Trailer Module Ignition

F30 Advanced Park Assist/Side Blind Zone Alert

F31 Engine Control Module

F32 Auxiliary Gauges

F33 Retained AccessoryPower

F34 Battery Voltage Sensing

F35 Tailgate Motor

F36 Rear Accessory PowerOutlet

F37 Interior Accessory PowerOutlet

F38 Cigar Lighter

F39 Not Used

F40 Trailer Module

Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Trunk Release

R2 Accessory

R3 Not Used

R4 Run

R5 Not Used

R6 Retained AccessoryPower

R7 Logistics

R8 Not Used

R9 Not Used

R10 Exhaust Valve

R11 Not Used

Relays R1, R2, R3, and R5 are PCBmounted relays.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


Vehicle Care 10-41

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-41.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-56.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile Tires

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type of

(Continued)


10-42 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

damage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate thetire manufactured date. The firsttwo digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.


Vehicle Care 10-43

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-58.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-68 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-61.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.


10-44 Vehicle Care

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.


Vehicle Care 10-45

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-48.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.


10-46 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-48 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-55.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-58.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget to check thespare tire. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, it should beat 420 kPa (60 psi). SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10-68 and Full-Size SpareTire on page 10-69 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning


Vehicle Care 10-49

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.


10-50 Vehicle Care

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-50.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-10.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

The full-size spare includes asensor for the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). The compact sparetire/wheel does not include a TPMSsensor. The TPMS will not monitoror display the spare tire air pressureuntil the tire/wheel is installed at oneof the four tire/wheel positions onthe vehicle.

Once installed, the spare tire sensorcode must be matched to the newposition on the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thelow tire pressure warning light andthe DIC warning message,if equipped, come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflation


Vehicle Care 10-51

pressure. Using the DIC, it may bepossible to view the tire pressurelevels. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-19.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-48.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition, but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-53, Tire Rotation onpage 10-54, and Tires onpage 10-40.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light,defined above, flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message may alsodisplay. The malfunction light andDIC warning message, if equipped,come on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause theseto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message,if equipped, should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.


10-52 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff when the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-56.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message, if equipped,come on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/

wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the followingorder: left front tire, right front tire,right rear tire, and left rear tire. Seeyour dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.



Vehicle Care 10-53

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

A message requestingacceptance of the process maydisplay.

6. If requested, press the SET/CLRbutton again to confirm theselection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the left front tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.

A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the right front tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8.

10. Proceed to the right rear tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8.

11. Proceed to the left rear tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the left rear tire,and the TPMS sensor matchingprocess is no longer active.The TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.


10-54 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-55and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-59.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-48and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-50.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.


Vehicle Care 10-55

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-53 and TireRotation on page 10-54.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be free


10-56 Vehicle Care

of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impact

the overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-42.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out at

about the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-54.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.


Vehicle Care 10-57

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-49.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-56 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they

must also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and

one-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction


Vehicle Care 10-59

tests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is

vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.


10-60 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has a tire size otherthan P235/50R18 99W size tires,do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is equipped withP235/50R18 99W size tires, usetire chains only where legal andonly when necessary. Use lowprofile chains that add no more

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-61

Caution (Continued)

than 12 mm thickness to the tiretread and inner sidewall. Usechains that are the proper size forthe tires. Install them on the tiresof the rear axle. Don't use chainson the tires of the front axle.Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-40. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


10-62 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Wrench

1. Open the trunk.

2. Lift the cover with the handle/strap and attach the hook to thetrunk lid.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.


10-64 Vehicle Care

5. The vehicle may have a secondretainer nut and panel.

To access the tools, remove thesecond retainer nut and panel.

6. Remove the tools and placethem near the tire beingchanged.

Remove the tool container fromthe vehicle, if necessary.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-61.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts.

Do not remove the wheel nuts.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the spare tire near you.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

5. Unfold the wheel wrench so itforms a right angle.

6. Slide the wheel wrench onto thedrive nut of the jack.

{ Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

7. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The locations are identified bycutouts in the underside of thedoor sill. The jack must not beused in any other position.


10-66 Vehicle Care

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Replace the jack, tools, containerand flat tire in the trunk by reversingthe steps used to remove them.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

{ Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.


Vehicle Care 10-69

{ Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Full-Size Spare TireIf the vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructionson how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10-63.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated.

The full-size spare includes a TPMSsensor. The TPMS will not monitoror display the spare tire air pressureuntil the tire/wheel is installed at oneof the four tire/wheel positions onthe vehicle. Once installed, thespare tire sensor code must bematched to the new position on thevehicle. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation for information aboutmatching the spare tire tothe TPMS.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-22.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


10-70 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

6.0L V8 Engine Shown, 3.6LV6 Engine Similar

1. Jump Start Positive Post2. Jump Start Negative Post

The jump start positive (1) andnegative (2) posts are in the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

These posts are used instead of adirect connection to the battery.

The positive jump start connectionis covered by a red cap. Remove toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-16.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.


Vehicle Care 10-71

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart remote positive (+) post (1)of the discharged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to theremote negative (–) post (2).

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables


10-72 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

There are two oval-shaped slots (1)under the front of the vehicle thatshould be used to move a disabledvehicle. Use only these slots tohook to the vehicle. The slots canbe accessed through the splashshield. Use an appropriate size Thook for the slot.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowing

{ Caution

Dolly towing or dinghy towing thevehicle may cause damagebecause of reduced groundclearance. Always put the vehicleon a flatbed truck or trailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If thevehicle must be towed, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10-72.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

This symbole is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as


10-74 Vehicle Care

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum or stainlesssteel. To prevent damage alwaysfollow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum orstainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces


10-76 Vehicle Care

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11-9.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Door Drain Holes

. Clear dirt and other foreignmaterials from the drain holes atthe bottom of the door panelswhich could trap water inside thepanels.


Vehicle Care 10-77

. Clean clogged drain holes.

. Avoid scratching the finish.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assiststep hinges, unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and falluse plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to “Finish Care”previously in this section.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops

per 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,

gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing these

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

solvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Convenience Net

If equipped with a convenience net,wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not Use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Vehicles equipped with SEO 6A3rubber mats, do not have floor matsand should not have floor matsadded.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage, if equipped:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats need

replacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-53.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle service

for up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-54.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.



. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-14.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-73. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-25.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

. Check spare wheel retainer.If loose, tighten with a torquewrench to 4.5 +/− 0.5Y.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-53.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care on page 10-73.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-73.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-10.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-73.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-24.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-24.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace rear axle fluid. (6) @ @ @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.



(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) The axle fluid temperatures maybe higher when driving in severeconditions. Drain and refill with newfluid after 2 hours of high speedpursuit driving, and then after every24 hours of high speed pursuitdriving. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-9.

(7) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-73.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.



The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-9 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-78 and Exterior Care onpage 10-73.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-14.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299570).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Rear Axle Castrol SAF Carbon Modified SAE 75W/85 API GL5 Differential Oil (GMPart No. 92184900).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric SiliconeGrease (GM Part No. 12345579).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 92066873 A3149C

Engine Oil Filter

3.6L V6 25177917 PF2129

6.0L V8 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 92184248 CF182

Spark Plugs

3.6L V6 12622561 41-109

6.0L V8 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Driver Side 92219233 —

Passenger Side 92219234 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the rear load floor,behind the spare tire tub, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11-9 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

3.6L V6 10.2 L 10.8 qt

6.0L V8 10.4 L 11 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 6.7 L 7.0 qt

6.0L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank 71 L 18.8 gal

Rear Axle Fluid 1.25 L 1.3 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)**

3.6L V6 11.3 L 11.9 qt

6.0L V8 6.3 L 6.7 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

**See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10-12 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 (LFX) 3 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm(0.037–0.040 in)

6.0L V8 (L77) 2 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm(0.037–0.040 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

6.0L V8 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-6Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-9

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-12

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility Assistance

Center at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.



. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give

permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM



Collision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit

poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded by

various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-4.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-18.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record



personal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310, ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.


Special Equipment Options 15-1

Special EquipmentOptions

SEO Standard OptionsSEO Standard Options -Police Package and SpecialService Package . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Engine Oil CoolingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Wiring Provisions for 12-VoltBattery Power Supply . . . . . . 15-3

SEO Available OptionsSEO Available Options -Police Package and SpecialService Package . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

Auxiliary Battery(SEO K5S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7

Auxiliary Dome Lamp -SEO 6C7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

Exterior Lamp EmergencyFlashing System -SEO 6J7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

Rear Windows Inoperative -SEO 6N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Inoperative Rear Door Locksand Handles - SEO 6N6 . . . . 15-9

Spotlamp - SEO 7X6 . . . . . . . . 15-9Spotlamps - SEO 7X7 . . . . . . 15-11Wiring Provisions for VehicleGrille Lamps and Speaker/Siren - SEO 6J3 . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

Spotlamp Provisions -SEO 7X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13


Hole in Roof - SEO 6B7 . . . . 15-14Hole in Roof - SEO 6J5 . . . . 15-14Trunk Lid Warning Lamps -SEO T53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Wiring Provisions for Horn/Siren Circuit - SEO 6J4 . . . 15-14

Common Keys - SEO6E3 and 6E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Keys and Keyless EntryTransmitters - Package ofSix - SEO AMF . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Delete Daytime RunningLamps and AutoHeadlamps - SEO VVS . . . 15-15

Vehicle Speed Limiter -SEO SGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

SEO StandardOptions

SEO Standard Options -Police Package andSpecial Service Package

{ Caution

GM cannot be responsible for anychanges made to the vehicle.Have all electrical and bodymodifications performed byexperienced technicians.

. Be sure that any modified oradded wiring will workproperly with your vehicle'swiring system.

. See that all wiring is properlyprotected by fuses, and notcausing an overload toconnectors and components.

(Continued)


15-2 Special Equipment Options

Caution (Continued)

. Do not route wiring in areasof the vehicle wheretemperatures can be high orwhere wiring may be cut,pinched, or rubbed.

. See that all added wiring is ofthe same or larger gaugethan the wire it is beingattached to for proper fuseprotection.

. Be sure that all holes drilledin the body are properlysealed and corrosionprotected. See that thevehicle's wiring harnesses,piping, and other componentshave not been displaced ordamaged during customerinstallations of equipment andwiring.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not route wiring orequipment which couldinterfere with roof-mountedside impact airbags. SeeAirbag Deployment Diagramson page 3-22.

{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle'selectrical system may damageyour vehicle's accessories. Do notoverload the vehicle's system byhaving unnecessary accessorieson at the same time.

Engine Oil CoolingSystem

Transmission Cooler

The transmission cooler is mountedin front of the radiator.



Engine Oil Cooler

Vehicles with the 6.0L V8 engineinclude an engine oil cooler. Theoil-to-coolant oil cooler is mountedon the lower left side of the engine,forward of the oil filter.

Wiring Provisions for12-Volt Battery PowerSupply

1. Ground Stud2. Prefuse Assembly3. Auxiliary Power Junction

Block4. Right Side Rear

Compartment Relay Center

An 8 mm ground stud (1) is locatedin the trunk on the passenger sideof the vehicle.

The auxiliary power junctionblock (3) is split to provide twocircuits and can be used to connectcustomer-furnished equipmentdirectly to the battery through6.0 mm² (10 gauge) auxiliary batterymodule wiring and two 60 ampprefuse assembly (2) fusible links.A maximum of 100 amps(1200 watts) can be connected.

Police relay outputs and controlcircuit connections are located atthe front of the slotted equipmentmounting plate between the frontseats in a coiled branch of the bodyharness and the circuits areterminated in two connectors.Battery power is supplied throughtwo prefuse assembly (2) fusiblelinks, one 100 amp and one 50 amp,to three circuit breakers and twocontrol relays located in the rightside rear compartment relaycenter (4). A 50 amp circuit breakerfeeds power directly from the100 amp fusible link througha 6.0 mm² (10 gauge) wire.



Two 30 amp circuit breakers supplypower from the 50 amp and100 amp fusible links through thecontacts of the control relays to3.0 mm² (12 gauge) wires.

Each relay is operated by applying12 volts to the 1.0 mm² (16 gauge),brown or blue/yellow leadsterminated in the 6–cavity connectorat the front of the mounting plate.12 volt battery power is terminatedin a 2–cavity connector at themounting plate. The total currentavailable through the 12-volt powersupply is 110 amps (1320 watts).

Ignition controlled power andsignal circuits are terminated in the6–cavity connector from the bodyharness as follows:. A violet/yellow 10 amp fused

circuit, hot in ACC/ACCESSORYand ON/RUN. The F2 fuse is inthe rear compartment fuse block.

. A violet/gray 10 amp fusedcircuit, hot in START and ON/RUN. The F33 fuse is in theengine compartment fuse block.

Signal circuits are terminated in the16–cavity connector from theinstrument panel harness as follows:. A yellow park signal wire from

the Body Control Module (BCM).The circuit provides switchedpower when the transmission isnot in P (Park) and the engine isrunning. The electrical loadattached to the park circuit mustnot exceed 0.5 amps and ismeant to operate one relay coil.

. A white/black vehicle speedsignal (4,000 pulses/mile) fromthe ABS module. Connect onlyhigh impedance load.

. A white/violet surveillance modecircuit. Automatic exteriorlighting, interior lighting, audiblesignals, and radio display areOFF when ground is applied. Alldriver requested and controlfunctions remain operational.PRNDL is at a very low light.



SEO AvailableOptions

SEO Available Options -Police Package andSpecial Service Package

{ Caution

GM cannot be responsible for anychanges made to the vehicle.Have all electrical and bodymodifications performed byexperienced technicians.

. Be sure that any modified oradded wiring will workproperly with your vehicle'swiring system.

. See that all wiring is properlyprotected by fuses, and notcausing an overload toconnectors and components.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Do not route wiring in areasof the vehicle wheretemperatures can be high orwhere wiring may be cut,pinched, or rubbed.

. See that all added wiring is ofthe same or larger gaugethan the wire it is beingattached to for proper fuseprotection.

. Be sure that all holes drilledin the body are properlysealed and corrosionprotected. See that thevehicle's wiring harnesses,piping, and other componentshave not been displaced ordamaged during customerinstallations of equipment andwiring.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not route wiring orequipment which couldinterfere with roof-mountedside impact airbags. SeeAirbag Deployment Diagramson page 3-22.

{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle'selectrical system may damageyour vehicle's accessories. Do notoverload the vehicle's system byhaving unnecessary accessorieson at the same time.

Auxiliary Battery(SEO K5S)

1. Auxiliary Battery2. Auxiliary Power Junction

Block3. Right Side Rear

Compartment Relay Center4. Battery Isolation Relay5. Prefuse Assembly6. Ground Stud



This feature consists of a 700 CCAauxiliary battery (1) mounted on thepassenger side of the trunk andconnected to the electrical systemwith a prefuse assembly (5). Alsoincluded is an isolation relay (4)which is activated whenever theignition is in the ON/RUN position.The isolation relay is intended toisolate the auxiliary battery andconnected load from the primarybattery to avoid unintended rundownof the primary battery. When theengine is running, the auxiliarybattery is charged. See WiringProvisions for 12-Volt Battery PowerSupply on page 15-3.

Auxiliary Dome Lamp -SEO 6C7The red and white auxiliary domelamp is located on the headlinerbetween the driver and the frontpassenger seating positions. Theswitch for this lamp is located at therear base of the lamp. To operate

the lamp, press the switch to oneside for red light, and the other forwhite light. Position the switch in thecenter for OFF.

Exterior LampEmergency FlashingSystem - SEO 6J7This feature provides a flashingmodule, headlamp alternatehigh-beam flashing, rear alternateflashing of the stop and back-uplamps, and a green control wire fora customer-furnished switch to turnthe module on or off. A second blue/green wire permits optional separatecontrol of headlamp flashing andrear lamps flashing with acustomer-furnished switch.

To operate the rear lamps flashingseparately, 12 volt power to thegreen wire must be OFF. Open theblue/green wire at the flashermodule connector P181, terminal Fin FWDLP harness and apply aseparate ground to the blue/green

wire via customer switching in the16 cavity up-fitter connector, locatedat the equipment mounting platebetween the front seats. Do notapply 12 volts to the blue/green wireto avoid damage to the BCM.

The headlamp flashing module is atthe rear edge of the passenger sideupper radiator support. Whenactivated, the high-beam headlampswill flash alternately at 2.4 flashesper second.

During daylight conditions, theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) areautomatically turned off wheneverthe headlamp flashing module isactivated. During night timeconditions, the low-beamheadlamps turn on automaticallywhile the high-beam headlampsflash. Turning on the high-beamheadlamps manually with the turnsignal lever will override the flashingmodule and the high-beamheadlamps will operatecontinuously.



When the headlamp flashingmodule is activated, the BodyControl Module (BCM) will flash thestoplamps and back-up lampsalternately at a rate of 2.4 flashesper second. The centerhigh-mounted stoplamp does notflash and operates only withapplication of the service brakes.

Rear WindowsInoperative - SEO 6N5This feature makes the rearwindows inoperative. The rearwindows can only be operated fromthe driver window switch.

Inoperative Rear DoorLocks and Handles -SEO 6N6This feature makes the rear doorlocks inoperative. When the featureis enabled, the rear door lockswitches are inoperative and therear doors can only be opened fromthe outside.

Spotlamp - SEO 7X6This feature includes onepillar-mounted driver side halogenspotlamp.



Spotlamps - SEO 7X7This feature includes driver side andpassenger side pillar-mountedspotlamps, separately fused.



Wiring Provisions forVehicle Grille Lamps andSpeaker/Siren - SEO 6J3Wiring provisions are provided forconnection of customer controlswitching to customer installed grillelamps and speaker/siren. Theinterior termination of the wires arein the 16–cavity connector locatedat the equipment mounting platebetween the front seats. The wiringcircuits are routed from underneaththe instrument panel to a 61 cm(2 ft) coil secured in the area behindthe grille, to the left of the hoodlatch.

Spotlamp Provisions -SEO 7X8Provision for customer installedspotlamp includes hole through theleft pillar, LH spotlamp bracket andaccessible power lead.

Spotlamp Provisions -SEO 7X9Provisions for customer installedspotlamps includes holes throughleft and right pillars, LH and RHspotlamp brackets and accessiblepower leads.



Hole in Roof - SEO 6B7A hole is provided on the center lineof the roof, aligned with the doorcenter pillar and a sealing harnessgrommet is installed.

Hole in Roof - SEO 6J5A hole is provided on the passengerside of the roof, aligned with thedoor center pillar and a sealingharness grommet is installed.

Trunk Lid WarningLamps - SEO T53

Two LED single-faced lamps aremounted to the inside of the trunklid. A red lamp is on the driver sideand a blue lamp is on the passengerside. The lamps are turned on whenthe trunk lid is unlatched. They arewired to flash alternately by aflasher located on the right reartrunk lid inner panel. Fuse F10 forthis circuit is located in the RearElectrical Center.

Wiring Provisions forHorn/Siren Circuit -SEO 6J4

This feature permits customerconnection of a switch to selecteither horn or siren operation whenthe horn pad is pressed.

Two 0.35 mm² (22 gauge) wires areconnected to an in-line connector inthe horn circuit of the instrumentpanel harness. The end of thisharness extension is in a 1.5 m (5 ft)loop of wire coiled under theglove box.



Common Keys - SEO6E3 and 6E4Ignition keys are coded alike for allvehicles in fleet. An unlimitednumber of ignition keys can beprogrammed for a fleet for eitherSEO 6E3 or SEO 6E4.

Keys and Keyless EntryTransmitters - Package ofSix - SEO AMFSix keys, cut to a vehicle code or toa common fleet code, SEO 6E3 orSEO 6E4, with integrated RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitters.Transmitters are not programmed.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Delete Daytime RunningLamps and AutoHeadlamps - SEO VVSDaytime Running Lamps and AutoHead Lamps are calibrated OFF.Exterior lamps are manuallycontrolled.

Vehicle Speed Limiter -SEO SGTVehicle speed is calibrated to limitvehicle speed to maximum of209 km/h (130 mph).



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-14AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Deployment Diagrams . . . . . . . .3-22Passenger Status Indicator . . . . 5-9Questions and AnswersAbout Airbags andSpecialty LawEnforcement Vehicles . . . . . . .3-19

Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticHeadlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24


i-2 INDEX

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Auxiliary Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Auxiliary Dome LampSEO - 6C7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Wiring Provisions for12-Volt Power Supply . . . . . . .15-3

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29

Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-13

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

CCaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-10CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49, 3-51Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

CircuitWiring Provisions forHorn/Siren - SEO 6J4 . . . . . 15-14


INDEX i-3

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-6Common Keys - SEO6E3 and 6E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-68CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . .13-9

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer-InstalledEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-6Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-12Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delete Daytime RunningLamps and AutoHeadlamps - SEO VVS . . . . . 15-15

Deployment Diagrams . . . . . . . . . 3-22DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-16Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


i-4 INDEX

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Cooling System Messages . . .5-23Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Engine (cont'd)Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-19Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Engine Oil Cooling System . . . . 15-2Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-12Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamp EmergencyFlashing System -SEO 6J7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Flasher, Wiring Provisions- SEO 6J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3

Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-17Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-18Requirements, California . . . . .9-32System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25


INDEX i-5

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

GGaugesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-18High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-18

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-24Hole in Roof - SEO 6B7 . . . . . . 15-14Hole in Roof - SEO 6J5 . . . . . . . 15-14Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Horn/Siren, WiringProvisions - SEO 6J4 . . . . . . . 15-14

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

InfoQuick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Inoperative Rear DoorLocks and Handles -SEO 6N6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Internet RadioPandora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15Stitcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1


i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-25Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Keyless EntryTransmitters - Package ofSix - SEO AMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42LampAuxiliary Dome, SEO- 6C7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8

LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior EmergencyFlashing System -SEO 6J7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8

Lamps (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Trunk Lid Warning -SEO T53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Vehicle Grille WiringProvisions - SEO 6J3 . . . . . 15-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

LightParking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-13Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-16

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-17Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-8Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-13Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-26


INDEX i-7

LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-17Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-10

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-25Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . .13-9

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18


i-8 INDEX

Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PPandora Internet Radio . . . . . . . . 7-15ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-18Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35

Police PackageSEO Available Options . . . . . . .15-6

Police Package and SpecialService Package, SEOStandard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-16Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

QQuestions and AnswersAbout Airbags andSpecialty LawEnforcement Vehicles . . . . . . . . 3-19

Quick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Rear Door Locks and Handles -SEO 6N6Inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-29Rear Windows Inoperative -SEO 6N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4


INDEX i-9

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-35Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-11

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . .13-11General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-26Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Questions and AnswersAbout Airbags andSpecialty LawEnforcement Vehicles . . . . . . .3-19

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . 3-11Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-10

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . .13-11General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-6SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-51

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

SEO Available OptionsPolice Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6


i-10 INDEX

SEO Standard OptionsPolice Package andSpecial Service Package . . . .15-1

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-11Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-6Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Speaker/Siren, WiringProvisions - SEO 6J3 . . . . . . . 15-13

Special Application Services . . . 11-5Special Equipment OptionsSpotlamp Provisions -SEO 7X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13


Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14SpotlampSEO 7X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9

Spotlamp Provisions -SEO 7X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

SpotlampsSEO 7X7, AvailableOption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11

StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stitcher Internet Radio . . . . . . . . . 7-18Storage AreasGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-49Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-36Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-72Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-26Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Trunk Lid Warning Lamps -SEO T53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-27Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Vehicle Speed Limiter -SEO SGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26


i-12 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-42Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25

Wiring Provisions12-Volt Battery PowerSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3

Horn/Siren Circuit -SEO 6J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Vehicle Grille Lamps, andSpeaker/Siren -SEO 6J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

00-Introduction_en_US 1..4 - GM Upfitter

Documents

Transcript of 00-Introduction_en_US 1..4 - GM Upfitter